ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.

Agenda_Intro1.
pdf
Intro1_M00_toc.pdf
Intro1_M01_intro.pdf
Intro1_M02_fea.pdf
Intro1_M03_getting_started.pdf
Intro1_M04_basics.pdf
Intro1_M05_gen_procedure.pdf
Intro1_M06_create_solid_model.pdf
Intro1_M07_create_FEA_model.pdf
Intro1_M08_define_material.pdf
Intro1_M09_loading.pdf
Intro1_M10_solution.pdf
Intro1_M11_structural.pdf
Intro1_M12_thermal.pdf
Intro1_M13_postprocessing.pdf
Intro1_M14_short-topics.pdf
Intro1_MAPP_Appendix.pdf
I d i ANSYS
Training Manual
Introduction to ANSYS
Part 1 Part 1
Training Manual
Introduction to ANSYS - Part 1
Inventory Number: 002268
First Edition
ANSYS Release: 10.0
Published Date: February 7, 2006
Registered Trademarks:
ANSYS
is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.

All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
manufacturers.
Disclaimer Notice:
This document has been reviewed and approved in accordance with the ANSYS, Inc. Documentation Review and
Approval Procedures. This ANSYS Inc. software product (the Program) and program documentation (Documentation)
are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS Software License Agreement that contains provisions concerning non-
disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The
Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that License Agreement.
Copyright 2006 SAS IP Inc Copyright 2006 SAS IP, Inc.
Proprietary data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.
All Rights Reserved.
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1. Introduction (8:00am 8:15am) 1-1
2. FEA and ANSYS (8:15am 9:00am) 2-1
A. About the Company 2-2
B About ANSYS 2-4
5. General Analysis Procedure (1:00 1:30pm) 5-1
A. Preliminary Decisions 5-5
B. Preprocessing 5-8
Create Solid Model 5-8
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
B. About ANSYS 2-4
C. What is FEA? 2-10
D. Instructor Example 2-13
E. Workshop (15 min.)
2-14
3. Getting Started (9:00am 11:00am) 3-1
Create FEA Model 5-10
Define Material 5-12
C. Solution 5-13
Define Loads 5-13
D. Postprocessing 5-15
Review Results 5-15
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g ( )
A. Interactive vs Batch Mode 3-2
B. Starting ANSYS 3-3
C. Product Launcher 3-4
D. ANSYS Workbench 3-9
E. Memory 3-12
F. GUI 3-15
G The Database and Files 3 37
Verification 5-18
6. Creating the Solid Model (1:30pm 2:45pm) 6-1
A. What to Model? 6-3
B. Importing Geometry 6-14
IGES Imports 6-14
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
G. The Database and Files 3-37
H. Exiting ANSYS 3-46
I. On-Line Help 3-47
J. Workshop (30 min.) 3-53
4. ANSYS Basics (11:00am 12:00pm) 4-1
A. Overview 4-2
IGES Imports 6 14
Connection Products 6-15
Workshops (30 min.) 6-19
C. ANSYS Native Commands 6-20
Definitions 6-21
D. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation 6-24
Working Plane 6 24
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
B. Plotting 4-3
C. Picking 4-10
D. Coordinate Systems 4-16
E. Select Logic 4-21
F. Components 4-28
G. Workshop (15 min.) 4-31
Working Plane 6-24
E. ANSYS Coordinate Systems 6-30
Active Coordinate System 6-30
Global Coordinate System 6-31
Local Coordinate System 6-32
Working Plane Coord. System 6-33
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-3
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
7. Creating the Finite Element Model 7-1
(3:00pm 6:00pm)
A. Overview 7-2
9. Loading (Day 2: 9:00am 9:30am) 9-1
A. Define Loads 9-3
B. Nodal Coordinate Systems 9-6
C Displacement Constraints 9-11
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A. Overview 7 2
B. Element Attributes 7-4
C. Multiple Element Attributes 7-29
D. Workshop 7-36
E. Controlling Mesh Density 7-37
F. Mesh Order Control 7-46
G Generating the Mesh 7-47
C. Displacement Constraints 9 11
D. Concentrated Forces 9-12
E. Verifying Loads 9-16
10. Solution (9:45am 11:45am) 10-1
A. Solvers 10-2
B D fi iti 10 10
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
G. Generating the Mesh 7-47
H. Changing a Mesh 7-49
I. Mapped Meshing 7-52
J. Hex-to-Tex Meshing 7-69
K. Mesh Extrusion 7-77
L. Sweep Meshing 7-82
M F E Imports 7 88
B. Definitions 10-10
C. Multiple Loadsteps 10-11
D. Workshops (90 min.) 10-19
11. Structural Analysis (1:00pm 2:30pm) 11-1
A Preprocessing 11-3
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
M. F.E. Imports 7-88
N. Workshops (90 min.) 7-89
Day 2
8. Defining the Material (8:00am 9:00am) 8-1
A. Preprocessing 11-3
B. Solution 11-5
C. Postprocessing 11-17
D. Workshops (45 min.) 11-25
12. Thermal Analysis (2:30pm 3:30pm) 12-1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
g ( )
A. Units 8-3
B. ANSYS Defined Materials 8-4
C. Material Model GUI 8-6
D. Listing Defined Materials 8-11
E. Workshops (30 min.) 8-12
y ( p p )
B. Solution 12-5
D. Workshop (30 min) 12-22
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-4
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
13. Postprocessing (4:00pm 9:00am) 13-1
A. Query Picking 13-3
B. Results Coordinate System 13-6
C. Path Operations 13-9
Appendix A-1
A. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation A-2
A. Definitions A-3
B. Top-Down Modeling A-6
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
C. Path Operations 13 9
D. Error Estimation 13-16
E. Load Case Combinations 13-25
F. Workshops 13-31
G. Results Viewer 13-32
H. Variable Viewer 13-40
I Report Generator 13-43
p g
C. Workshop A-22
D. Bottom-Up Modeling A-23
E. Workshops A-37
F. Best Modeling Practices A-38
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
I. Report Generator 13-43
J. Workshop (120 min.) 13-51
Day 3
14. Short Topics (9:00am 10:30am) 14-1
A T lb & Abb i i 14 3
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
A. Toolbar & Abbreviations 14-3
B. Start File 14-9
C. APDL 14-10
D. Defining Parameters 14-11
E. Using Parameters 14-15
F. Retrieving Database Information 14-18
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
G. Batch Mode 14-22
H. Input Files 14-23
I. Session Editor 14-28
J. Workshops (30 min.) 14-30
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-5
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1. Introduction 9. Loading
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
2. FEA and ANSYS
3. Getting Started
10. Solution
11. Structural Analysis
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
4. ANSYS Basics
5. General Analysis Procedure
12. Thermal Analysis
13. Postprocessing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
6. Creating the Solid Model
7. Creating the Finite Element Model
14. Short Topics
Appendix
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
8. Defining the Material
(Slide shown for Hyperlinking to Chapters)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-6
I d i ANSYS
Training Manual
Introduction to ANSYS
Part 1 Part 1
Training Manual
Inventory Number: 002268
First Edition
ANSYS Release: 10.0
Published Date: February 7, 2006
Registered Trademarks:
ANSYS
is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.

All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
manufacturers.
Disclaimer Notice:
This document has been reviewed and approved in accordance with the ANSYS, Inc. Documentation Review and
Approval Procedures. This ANSYS Inc. software product (the Program) and program documentation (Documentation)
are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS Software License Agreement that contains provisions concerning non-
disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The
Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that License Agreement.
Copyright 2006 SAS IP Inc Copyright 2006 SAS IP, Inc.
Proprietary data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.
All Rights Reserved.
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1. Introduction 1-1
2. FEA and ANSYS 2-1
A. About the Company 2-2
5. General Analysis Procedure 5-1
A. Preliminary Decisions 5-5
B. Preprocessing 5-8
Create Solid Model 5-8
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
B. About ANSYS 2-4
C. What is FEA? 2-10
D. Instructor Example 2-13
E. Workshop 2-14
3. Getting Started 3-1
Create FEA Model 5-10
Define Material 5-12
C. Solution 5-13
Define Loads 5-13
D. Postprocessing 5-15
Review Results 5-15
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
A. Interactive vs Batch Mode 3-2
B. Starting ANSYS 3-3
C. Product Launcher 3-4
D. ANSYS Workbench 3-9
E. Memory 3-12
F. GUI 3-15
Verification 5-18
6. Creating the Solid Model 6-1
A. What to Model? 6-3
B. Importing Geometry 6-14
IGES Imports 6-14
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
F. GUI 3 15
G. The Database and Files 3-37
H. Exiting ANSYS 3-46
I. On-Line Help 3-47
J. Workshop 3-53
4. ANSYS Basics 4-1
IGES Imports 6 14
Connection Products 6-15
Workshops 6-19
C. ANSYS Native Commands 6-20
Definitions 6-21
D. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation 6-24
Working Plane 6 24
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
4. ANSYS Basics 4 1
A. Overview 4-2
B. Plotting 4-3
C. Picking 4-10
D. Coordinate Systems 4-16
E. Select Logic 4-21
F Components 4-28
Working Plane 6-24
E. ANSYS Coordinate Systems 6-30
Active Coordinate System 6-30
Global Coordinate System 6-31
Local Coordinate System 6-32
Working Plane Coord. System6-33
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-3
F. Components 4-28
G. Workshop 4-31
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
7. Creating the Finite Element Model 7-1
A. Overview 7-2
B. Element Attributes 7-4
C. Multiple Element Attributes 7-29
9. Loading 9-1
A. Define Loads 9-3
B. Nodal Coordinate Systems 9-6
C Displacement Constraints 9-11
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
C. Multiple Element Attributes 7 29
D. Workshop 7-36
E. Controlling Mesh Density 7-37
F. Mesh Order Control 7-46
G. Generating the Mesh 7-47
H. Changing a Mesh 7-49
I Mapped Meshing 7-52
C. Displacement Constraints 9 11
D. Concentrated Forces 9-12
E. Verifying Loads 9-16
10. Solution 10-1
A. Solvers 10-2
B D fi iti 10 10
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
I. Mapped Meshing 7-52
J. Hex-to-Tex Meshing 7-69
K. Mesh Extrusion 7-77
L. Sweep Meshing 7-82
M. F.E. Imports 7-88
N. Workshops 7-89
B. Definitions 10-10
C. Multiple Loadsteps 10-11
D. Workshops 10-19
11. Structural Analysis 11-1
A Preprocessing 11-3
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
8. Defining the Material 8-1
A. Units 8-3
B. ANSYS Defined Materials 8-4
C. Material Model GUI 8-6
D. Listing Defined Materials 8-11
E W k h 8 12
B. Solution 11-5
D. Workshops 11-25
12. Thermal Analysis 12-1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
E. Workshops 8-12
y
B. Solution 12-5
D. Workshop 12-22
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-4
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
13. Postprocessing 13-1
A. Query Picking 13-3
B. Results Coordinate System 13-6
C. Path Operations 13-9
Appendix A-1
A. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation A-2
A. Definitions A-3
B. Top-Down Modeling A-6
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
C. Path Operations 13 9
D. Error Estimation 13-16
E. Load Case Combinations 13-25
F. Workshops 13-31
G. Results Viewer 13-32
H. Variable Viewer 13-40
I Report Generator 13-43
p g
C. Workshop A-22
D. Bottom-Up Modeling A-23
E. Workshops A-37
F. Best Modeling Practices A-38
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
I. Report Generator 13-43
J. Workshop 13-51
14. Short Topics 14-1
A. Toolbar & Abbreviations 14-3
B Start File 14 9
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
B. Start File 14-9
C. APDL 14-10
D. Defining Parameters 14-11
E. Using Parameters 14-15
F. Retrieving Database Information 14-18
G. Batch Mode 14-22
H I t Fil 14 23
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
H. Input Files 14-23
I. Session Editor 14-28
J. Workshops 14-30
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-5
Training Manual
Table of Contents
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1. Introduction 9. Loading
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
2. FEA and ANSYS
3. Getting Started
10. Solution
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
4. ANSYS Basics
13. Postprocessing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
14. Short Topics
Appendix
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
TOC-6
Chapter 1
Introduction
Training Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Welcome!
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Welcome to the Introduction to ANSYS Training Course!
Thi t i i th b i f h t ANSYS f
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
This training course covers the basics of how to use ANSYS for
static or steady-state analyses.
It is intended for all new or occasional ANSYS users regardless of
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
actual ANSYS application.
Several advanced training courses are available on specific
topics See the training course schedule on the ANSYS
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
topics. See the training course schedule on the ANSYS
homepage: www.ansys.com under Training Services.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
1-2
Training Manual
Course Objectives
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
j
To teach the basics of ANSYS in the following areas:
ANSYS biliti b i ANSYS t i l d th ANSYS GUI
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS capabilities, basic ANSYS terminology, and the ANSYS GUI
How to perform a complete ANSYS analysis the basic steps
involved
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Building or importing solid models and meshing
Applying loads solving and reviewing results
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Applying loads, solving, and reviewing results
Productivity enhancement tools -- select logic, APDL, batch mode, etc.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
1-3
Training Manual
Course Material
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The Training Manual you have is an exact copy of the slides.
W k h d i ti d i t ti i l d d i th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Workshop descriptions and instructions are included in the
Workshop Supplement.
Copies of the workshop files are available (upon request) from the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p p ( p q )
instructor.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
1-4
Training Manual
Table of Contents Chapter Links
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1. Introduction
2 FEA d ANSYS
9. Loading
10 S l ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
2. FEA and ANSYS
3. Getting Started
4 ANSYS B i
10. Solution
12 Th l A l i
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
4. ANSYS Basics
6 C ti th S lid M d l
13. Postprocessing
14 Sh t T i
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
8 D fi i th M t i l
14. Short Topics
Appendix
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
1-5
Chapter 2
FEA and ANSYS
Training Manual
Chapter 2 - FEA and ANSYS
A. About the Company
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
ANSYS, Inc.
Developer of ANSYS family of
d t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
products
Headquartered in Canonsburg, PA -
USA (south of Pittsburgh)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ANSYS Channel Partners
Sales and support network for ANSYS
Over 75 offices worldwide
L l ti f ANSYS lti
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Local expertise for ANSYS consulting
and training
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-2
Training Manual
About the Company
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
ANSYS Support Coordinator (ASC)
Contact for ANSYS at your company site
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Focal point for ANSYS correspondence; software updates, error
notices, newsletter and other mailings, etc.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
For more information about ANSYS and the company:
www.ansys.com
Where youll find the Customer Portal
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
On-line documentation
Training manuals from other ANSYS courses
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-3
Training Manual
B. About ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS, Inc. Family of Products include the following:
ANSYS Ad d li h i l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS Advanced nonlinear mechanical
and multiphysics FEA solution capabilities
ANSYS Workbench Complete environment
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
for geometry modeling, mesh manipulation,
structural/thermal analysis, and optimization,
which is tightly integrated with CAD packages
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
CFX State-of-the-art CFD solvers,
including the coupled, parallel CFX-5 solver
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
ICEM CFD Powerful meshing tools with
general pre- and post-processing features,
including ICEM CFD for generating complex
CFD grids and AI*Environment for creating
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-4
CFD grids and AI Environment for creating
with sophisticated structural FEA meshes
Training Manual
About ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS is a complete FEA software package used by engineers
worldwide in virtually all fields of engineering. Partial listing of the
biliti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
capabilities:
Structural
Linear
Nonlinear
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Nonlinear
Material, Geometric, Contact
Dynamics
Modal Harmonic Transient Dynamic Spectrum Random Vibration
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Modal, Harmonic, Transient Dynamic, Spectrum, Random Vibration
Explicit Dynamics with ANSYS LS-DYNA
Thermal
Steady State and Transient
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Steady State and Transient
Fluid (CFD, Acoustics, and other fluid analyses)
Low- and High-Frequency Electromagnetics
Coupled Field
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-5
Training Manual
About ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A partial list of industries in which ANSYS is used:
Aerospace
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Automotive
Biomedical
Bridges & Buildings
Electronics & Appliances
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Electronics & Appliances
Heavy Equipment & Machinery
MEMS - Micro Electromechanical Systems
Sporting Goods
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
p g
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-6
Training Manual
About ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS Multiphysics - Provides the analysis industry's most comprehensive
coupled physics tool combining structural, thermal, CFD, acoustic and electromagnetic
simulation capabilities into a single software product
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
simulation capabilities into a single software product.
ANSYS Mechanical - Structural and Thermal analysis tool which includes a full
complement of nonlinear and linear elements, material laws ranging from metal to rubber,
and the most comprehensive set of solvers available.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ANSYS Structural - Provides all the power of ANSYS nonlinear structural capabilities
-- as well as linear capabilities -- to deliver the highest quality, most-reliable structural
simulation results available.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS Professional Inexpensive, easy-to-use program for structural/thermal
analysis projects.
ANSYS DesignSpace An easy-to-use package that gives designers the tool to P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
conceptualize, design and validate ideas right on the desktop.
ANSYS LS-DYNA Meets design challenges by fusing LSTCs LS-DYNA explicit
dynamic solver technology with the pre-/post-processing power of ANSYS software. This
powerful pairing helps engineers understand the elaborate combinations of nonlinear
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-7
powerful pairing helps engineers understand the elaborate combinations of nonlinear
phenomena found in crash tests, metal forging, stamping and catastrophic failures.
ANSYS Emag Addresses the analysis needs of the low-frequency electromagnetics
market.
Training Manual
About ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Workbench Modules:
DesignModeler Workbench application that provides modeling functions unique for simulation that
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
g pp p g q
include detailed geometry creation, CAD geometry modification, and concept model creation tool.
DesignXplorer Works within the Workbench environment to perform Design Of Experiments (DOE)
analyses of any Workbench simulation, including those with CAD parameters.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y y , g p
DesignXplorer VT A robust Variational Technology solution that gives users a broader view of design
concepts providing complete FEA results for every design point.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS Fatigue Adds the capability to simulate performance under anticipated cyclic loading conditions
over anticipated product life span.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-8
Training Manual
About ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Other products:
ANSYS ICEM CFD Provides sophisticated geometry acquisition, mesh
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
generation, post-processing and mesh optimization tools.
ANSYS CFX Suite of finite-volume-based Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
software, offered by CFX, an ANSYS, Inc. subsidiary including CFX-5, the best-in-class
CFD software.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
CFD software.
ANSYS ParaMesh a tool that works directly on legacy models. The mesh, a
tessellated representation, can be parameterized and made to move almost as though it
were geometry, giving a legacy model incredible utility.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-9
Training Manual
C. What is FEA?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Finite Element Analysis is a way to simulate loading conditions on
a design and determine the designs response to those
conditions
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
conditions.
The design is modeled using discrete building blocks called
elements.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Each element has exact equations
that describe how it responds to a
certain load.
Historical Note
The finite element method of
structural analysis was created N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The sum of the response of all
elements in the model gives the
total response of the design.
The elements have a finite number
by academic and industrial
researchers during the 1950s
and 1960s.
The underlying theory is over
100 years old and was the basis
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The elements have a finite number
of unknowns, hence the name
finite elements.
100 years old, and was the basis
for pen-and-paper calculations in
the evaluation of suspension
bridges and steam boilers.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-10
Training Manual
What is FEA?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The finite element model, which has a finite number of unknowns,
can only approximate the response of the physical system, which
h i fi it k
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
has infinite unknowns.
So the question arises: How good is the approximation?
Unfortunately, there is no easy
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Unfortunately, there is no easy
answer to this question. It depends
entirely on what you are simulating
and the tools you use for the
simulation. We will, however,
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
simulation. We will, however,
attempt to give you guidelines
throughout this training course.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Physical System F.E. Model
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-11
Training Manual
What is FEA?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Why is FEA needed?
T d th t f t t t ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To reduce the amount of prototype testing
Computer simulation allows multiple what-if scenarios to be tested
quickly and effectively.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
To simulate designs that are not suitable for prototype testing
Example: Surgical implants, such as an artificial knee
The bottom line:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The bottom line:
Cost savings
Time savings reduce time to market!
Create more reliable, better-quality designs
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Create more reliable, better quality designs
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-12
Training Manual
D. Instructor Example
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Your instructor is going to do a simple example so you get a feel
for what youre going to be learning.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The instructor will do the example through the GUI without going
into any detail on how to generate the model.
The e ample is of a cantile er beam ith a load at the end
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The example is of a cantilever beam with a load at the end.
You will see that the deflection at the tip matches theory.
= PL
3
/3EI = (-100)*(10
3
)/(3)*(30e6)*(1/12) = -0.013 N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Instructor cheat sheet:
/prep7
mp,ex,1,30e6
mp nuxy 1 0 3
alls
d,node(0,0.5,0),uy
f node(10 1 0) fy 100
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
et,1,plane42
blc4,0,0,10,1
amesh,all
nsel,s,loc,x,0
f,node(10,1,0),fy,-100
/solu
solve
/post1
plns,u,y
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-13
d,all,ux
Training Manual
E. Workshop
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W2 Introductory Workshop
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
2-14
Chapter 3
Getting Started
Training Manual
Chapter 3 Getting Started
A. Interactive vs Batch
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Two ways of working with ANSYS: Interactive and Batch Modes
Interacti e mode allo s o to interact li e ith ANSYS re ie ing
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Interactive mode allows you to interact live with ANSYS, reviewing
each operation as you go.
Of the three main phases of an analysis preprocessing, solution,
postprocessing the preprocessing and postprocessing phases are best
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g g
suited for interactive mode.
Batch mode allows you to submit a batch file of commands which
ANSYS runs in the background
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS runs in the background.
We will mainly cover interactive mode in this course.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-2
Training Manual
B. Starting ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Command Line Start-up
Allows you to start ANSYS by entering a command at the system
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
y y g y
level.
Not discussed in this course, details can be found in the Operations
Guide
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Guide.
Product Launcher
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Allows you to select and start ANSYS products and utilities.
On Unix systems, issue launcher100 to bring up the launcher.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
y g p
On Windows systems, press:
Start > Programs > ANSYS 10.0 > ANSYS Product Launcher
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-3
Training Manual
C. Product Launcher
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Launcher has four tabs: File Management,
Customization/Preferences, Distributed Solver Setup, and MFX-
ANSYS/CFX S t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS/CFX Setup.
Launcher is used to
select the Simulation
Environment (i e :
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Environment (i.e.:
ANSYS, ANSYS Batch,
ANSYS Workbench*,
MFX - ANSYS/CFX, LS-
S )
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
DYNA Solver.)
Available license and
Add-on Modules are
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Add on Modules are
selected here.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-4 *To be discussed later
Training Manual
Product Launcher
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
File Management Tab is
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
g
used to specify the
Working Directory (where
all of your files will
reside) and a Job Name
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
reside) and a Job Name
of your choosing. The
default Job Name is
file.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-5
Training Manual
Product Launcher
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Customization/Preferences
tab allows you to set
ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
memory options, run a
custom version of ANSYS,
define parameters, set the
language to be used by the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g y
Graphical User Interface
(GUI), and specify a
Graphics Device (2D or 3D).
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
A customizable file called
start100.ans can also be
read at start-up.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-6
Training Manual
Product Launcher
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Distributed Solver Setup
tab is used to set up
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
tab is used to set up
Parallel Performance
solving options.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Other, more advanced
options such as
Distributed Processing
are also selected here
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
are also selected here..
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-7
Training Manual
Product Launcher
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
MFX - ANSYS/CFX
Setup tab is used to
set up ANSYS Multi-
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
set up ANSYS Multi-
field solving options
for ANSYS and CFX.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-8
Training Manual
D. ANSYS Workbench
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Quick note about the
ANSYS Workbench...
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-9
Training Manual
...ANSYS Workbench
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS Workbench has been developed to make the following Workbench
technology strengths available to traditional ANSYS users:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
CAD Associativity
Plug-In architecture used to maintain associativity with the CAD systems for solid and
surface models, allowing you to make design changes to your CAD model without having
to reapply any of the loads and or supports.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y y
Bi-Directional Associativity
Provides control of your key CAD model parameter in the Workbench parameter manager.
Parameter management driving DOE optimization
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Parameter management driving DOE optimization
Ability to control both simulation parameters - such as material properties, force direction,
and temperature - as well as CAD parameters.
Web-Based Engineering Report
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Automatically captures engineering info and publishes it in a web based HTML document.
Robust automatic meshing capabilities
Automatic contact recognition
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-10
True Engineering Wizard
Training Manual
...ANSYS Workbench
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Supported Analyses include:
Static Structural Analysis
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Linear, Nonlinear Contact, Nonlinear Geometry, Nonlinear Material
Steady-State and Transient Thermal Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
Modal Analysis
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Modal Analysis
ANSYS commands can be used within Workbench.
Th Fi i El M d l b f d h ANSYS
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The Finite Element Model can be transferred to the ANSYS
Environment.
ANSYS Workbench is covered in detail in a separate training
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
ANSYS Workbench is covered in detail in a separate training
course (Workbench Simulation Introduction).
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-11
Training Manual
E. Memory Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
ANSYS Executable memory is the memory required for the
ANSYS program. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS Workspace is the memory ANSYS requires to run in
addition to the ANSYS Executable memory.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Real memory is the amount of actual, physical memory (RAM)
available through memory chips on your machine.
System virtual memory is simply a portion of the computer's hard
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
System virtual memory is simply a portion of the computer s hard
disk used by the system to supplement physical memory.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-12
Training Manual
Memory Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
Workspace space (i.e m ) is the memory ANSYS needs to run.
Default is 512 MB on Windows and UNIX machines.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Database space (i.e. db) is used to work with the ANSYS
database. For example, model geometry, material properties,
loads, etc. Defaults to 256MB on Windows and UNIX machines.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Scratch space is where all internal calculations are done. For
example, element matrix formulation, frontal solution, Boolean
calculations and so on
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
calculations, and so on.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
S t h W k D t b
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-13
Scratch space = Workspace - Database
Training Manual
ANSYS Memory Manager
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y g
ANSYS Memory Manager will be used when Use custom memory
settings is unchecked on the Customization/Preferences tab of the
P d h
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Product Launcher.
When the ANSYS Memory Manager is specified, ANSYS will allocate
more memory from the system when it is needed.
When custom memory settings are specified, no more memory can be
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
When custom memory settings are specified, no more memory can be
accessed and the specified memory can not be released for other
tasks.
In general you shouldnt worry about memory management in
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
In general, you shouldn t worry about memory management in
ANSYS. The ANSYS Memory Manager will do the job for you.
However, there are exceptions when you will need set the Total
Workspace.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
See Chapter 19 of the Basic Analysis Guide for more details on
Memory Management and Configuration.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-14
Training Manual
F. GUI - Layout
Utility Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
Output
Window
Icon Toolbar Menu
Input Line Raise/Hidden Icon
Contact Manager Icon
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Abbreviation Toolbar Menu
Command Window Icon
Model Control
Toolbar
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Graphics Area
Main Menu
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Current Settings
User Prompt Info
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-15
Training Manual
GUI - Layout
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Fonts of the layout can be customized:
Windows System
Utilit M M Ct l F t S l ti
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Utility Menu > Menu Ctrls > Font Selection...
Unix system:
Common Desktop Environment (CDE) uses the system settings
Otherwise (e g a telnet to a Unix Machine) uses the ~/ Xdefaults settings
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Otherwise (e.g. a telnet to a Unix Machine) uses the ~/.Xdefaults settings
*EUIDL*Font: Times 12 normal
*EUIDL*Background: purple
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The GUI has been modularized using the Tcl/Tk language which allows
for dialog boxes, ANSYS messages, etc. to be easily changed to a
countrys native language.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-16
Training Manual
GUI - Graphics Window
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Display location of model entities, postprocessing contours, and
postprocessing graphs.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
p p g g p
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Graphics Area
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-17
Training Manual
GUI - Main Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Tree structure format.
C t i th i f ti i d f
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Contains the main functions required for an
analysis.
Use scroll bar to gain access to long tree
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g
structures.
Colors used to show tree level.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
scroll bar
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-18
Training Manual
GUI - Main Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Before collapsing Preprocessor Branch
After expanding Preprocessor Branch
Tree structure behavior sub branch preserved
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
p g p
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Select to collapse
Preprocessor Branch
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The tree structure is the same before
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-19
and after the Preprocessor branch of
Main Menu is collapsed
Training Manual
GUI - Main Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Position mouse cursor on branch of Main
Expand all option
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Menu then select right mouse button
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The option to expand the
branch is displayed
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Selecting Expand All expands
th b h t t
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-20
the branch contents
Training Manual
GUI - Main Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Right Click in Main Menu
and select Preferences
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
and select Preferences .
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Level color, filtering and
expansion of Main Menu
can be changed.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-21
Training Manual
GUI - Main Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
With Expand headings and
Collapse siblings behavior active
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Creating a Volume branch open
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
When the Delete branch is opened,
the Create branch is closed
Note, inactivate Collapse siblings to
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-22
, p g
keep open the Create branch
Training Manual
GUI - Main Menu Filtered Branches
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Main Menu with structural and
thermal element type defined
Main Menu with only thermal
element type defined
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Only Apply branches shown are those
for defined element types
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-23
Training Manual
GUI - Abbreviation Toolbar Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Contains abbreviations -- short-cuts to commonly used
commands and functions. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A few predefined abbreviations are available, but you can add
your own. Requires knowledge of ANSYS commands.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
A powerful feature which you can use to create your own button
menu system!
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-24
Training Manual
GUI - Icon Toolbar Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Contains icons of commonly used functions.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Can be customized by the user (i.e adding icons, additional
toolbars)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Pan-Zoom-Rotate Save Analysis
Image Capture
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Open ANSYS File
Image Capture
Report Generator
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
New Analysis
ANSYS Help
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-25
Training Manual
GUI - Icon Toolbar Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Jobname definition when using Open ANSYS File Icon:
the ANSYS jobname will be changed to the prefix of the database file being resumed.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Open ANSYS File
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
When opening the blades.db database
(using the Open ANSYS File Icon), the
jobname will be changed to blades.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The Open ANSYS File Icon can be used to open either ANSYS
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-26
Database or ANSYS Command file types
Training Manual
GUI - Raise/Hidden Icon
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The Raise/Hidden Icon can be used to bring to the front any
hidden ANSYS created windows (except the output window).
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Select Raise/ Hidden Icon
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Select Raise/ Hidden Icon
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Pan/Zoom/Rotate
Widget Hidden
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Pan/Zoom/Rotate
Widget Shown
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-27
Training Manual
GUI - Input Window
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Allows you to enter commands. (Most GUI functions actually
send commands to ANSYS. If you know these commands, you
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
can type them in the Input Window).
As a command is typed, the format of the command is
dynamically displayed.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
dynamically displayed.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Click on the
X to return
the input to
the toolbar.
Clicking on the ANSYS
Command Window Icon
th i t li t
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
moves the input line to a
separate command
window, which can be
moved around the screen.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-28
Training Manual
GUI - Input Window
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
List of issued commands
Reissuing commands:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Use scroll bar to gain access
to all commands issued
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Select down arrow to see
Commands can be reissued by double-
li ki th li t d d
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Select down arrow to see
list of issued commands
clicking on the listed command
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The up and down arrows on the keyboard can be
used to select different listed commands
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-29
Training Manual
GUI - Utility Menu
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Contains utilities that are generally available throughout the
ANSYS session: graphics, on-line help, select logic, file controls,
t
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
etc.
Conventions used in Utility Menu:
indicates a dialog box
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
indicates a dialog box
+ indicates graphical picking
> indicates a submenu
(blank) indicates an action
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
(blank) indicates an action
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-30
Training Manual
GUI - Current Settings
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
The current element attributes settings, and currently active
coordinate system are displayed at the bottom on the GUI. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-31
Element Attributes
Active Coordinate System
Training Manual
GUI - User prompt info
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Instructions to the user are displayed in the lower left hand area of
the GUI. The user will be given user prompt info for operations
h i ki ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
such as picking operations.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-32
User Prompt Info
Training Manual
GUI - Output Window
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The output window gives the user feedback on how ANSYS
interpreted the users input. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The Output Window is independent of the ANSYS menus.
Caution: Closing the output window closes the entire ANSYS
session!
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Note: The output can
be sent to a file using
the /OUTPUT command.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Able to verify the ANSYS version
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-33
Training Manual
GUI - Preferences
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The Preferences dialog (Main Menu >
Preferences) allows you to filter out
h i th t t li bl t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
menu choices that are not applicable to
the current analysis.
For example, if you are doing a thermal
l i h t filt t
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
analysis, you can choose to filter out
other disciplines, thereby reducing the
number of menu items available in the
GUI:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Only thermal element types will be shown
in the element type selection dialog.
Only thermal loads will be shown.
Etc. P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-34
Training Manual
GUI Other Notes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Other GUI Notes
S di l b h b th A l d OK b tt
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Some dialog boxes have both Apply and OK buttons.
Apply applies the dialog settings, but retains (does not close) the
dialog box for repeated use.
OK applies the dialog settings and closes the dialog box.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
pp g g g
Remember that you are not restricted to using the menus. If you
know the command, feel free to enter it in the Input Window!
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The output window is not affected by the Raise/Hidden Button.
For convenience, the user may want to resize the GUI, so part of
the output window is displayed to allow easy access.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-35
Training Manual
GUI - Demo
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Start ANSYS using the ANSYS Product Launcher
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Show the various parts of the GUI
Bring up Keypoints in Active CS dialog box and show the difference
between OK and Apply
Show the Preferences dialog
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Show the Preferences dialog
Explain the Output window
Show the use of the Raise/Hidden Icon
Explain the Main Menu behavior
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-36
Training Manual
G. The Database and Files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The term ANSYS database refers to the data ANSYS maintains in
memory as you build, solve, and postprocess your model. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The database stores both your input data and some results data:
Input data -- information you must enter, such as model dimensions,
material properties, and load data.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p p ,
Results data -- a set of quantities that ANSYS calculates, such as
displacements, stresses, strains, and reaction forces.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-37
Training Manual
The Database and Files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Save and Resume
Si th d t b i t d i th t (RAM) it
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Since the database is stored in the computers memory (RAM), it
is good practice to save it to disk frequently so that you can
restore the information in the event of a computer crash or power
failure.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The SAVE operation copies the database from memory to a file
called the database file (or db file for short).
Th i t t d i t li k T lb > SAVE DB
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The easiest way to do a save is to click on Toolbar > SAVE_DB
Or use:
Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db
Utility Menu > File > Save as
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Utility Menu > File > Save as
SAVE command
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-38
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To restore the database from the db file back into memory, use the
RESUME operation. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Toolbar > RESUME_DB
Or use:
Utility Menu > File > Resume Jobname.db
Utilit M > Fil > R f
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Utility Menu > File > Resume from
RESUME command
The default file name for SAVE and RESUME is jobname.db, but
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
j ,
you can choose a different name by using the Save as or
Resume from functions.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-39
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Notes on SAVE and RESUME:
Choosing the Save as or Resume from function does NOT change
th t j b
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the current jobname.
If you save to the default file name and a jobname.db already exists,
ANSYS will first copy the old file to jobname.dbb as a back-up.
Note, ANSYS only supports one backup file (i.e. jobname.dbb).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The db file is simply a snapshot of what is in memory at the time the
save is done.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-40
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Tips on SAVE and RESUME:
Periodically save the database as you progress through an analysis.
ANSYS d NOT d t ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS does NOT do automatic saves.
You should SAVE the database before attempting an unfamiliar
operation (such as a Boolean or meshing) or an operation that may
cause major changes (such as a delete).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
RESUME can then be used as an undo if you dont like the
results of that operation.
SAVE is also recommended before doing a solve.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-41
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Clearing the Database
Th Cl D t b ti ll
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The Clear Database operation allows
you to zero out the database and
start fresh. It is similar to exiting and
re-entering ANSYS.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New
Or use the /CLEAR command.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-42
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Files
ANSYS it d d l fil d i l i Fil
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS writes and reads several files during an analysis. File names
are of the format jobname.ext.
Jobname
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
A name you choose while starting ANSYS, up to 32 characters. Defaults to
file.
Can be changed within ANSYS with the /FILNAME command (Utility Menu >
File > Change Jobname)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
File > Change Jobname).
Extension
Identifies the contents of the file, such as .db for database.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Usually assigned by ANSYS but can be defined by user (/ASSIGN).
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-43
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Typical files:
jobname.log: Log file, ASCII.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Contains a log of every command issued during the session.
If you start a second session with the same jobname in the same
working directory, ANSYS will append to the previous log file (with
a time stamp)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
a time stamp).
jobname.err: Error file, ASCII.
Contains all errors and warnings encountered during the session.
ANSYS will also append to an existing error file.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
jobname.db, .dbb: Database file, binary.
Compatible across all supported platforms.
jobname.rst, .rth, .rmg, .rfl: Results files, binary.
C i l d l l d b ANSYS d i l i
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Contains results data calculated by ANSYS during solution.
Compatible across all supported platforms.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-44
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
File Management Tips
Run each analysis project in a separate working directory.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
y p j p g y
Use different jobnames to differentiate various analysis runs.
You should keep the following files after any ANSYS analysis:
log file ( .log)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
og e ( og)
database file ( .db)
results files (.rst, .rth, )
load step files, if any (.s01, .s02, ...)
physics files (.ph1, .ph2, ...)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Use /FDELETE or Utility Menu > File > ANSYS File Options to automatically
delete files no longer needed by ANSYS during that session.
A t ANSYS Fil i
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
A note on ANSYS File sizes:
The maximum size of an ANSYS file depends on the system limit and on the
ability of ANSYS to handle large files on that system. Most computer systems
now handle very large files without any need for the automatic file splitting
option that is provided in ANSYS. See the Operations Guide for system
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-45
p p p y
specifics.
Training Manual
H. Exiting ANSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Three ways to exit ANSYS:
Toolbar > QUIT
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Utility Menu > File > Exit
Use the /EXIT command in the Input Window
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-46
Training Manual
I. On-Line Help
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS uses an on-line documentation system to provide
extensive help. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You can get help on:
ANSYS commands
element types
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
element types
analysis procedures
special GUI widgets such as Pan-Zoom-Rotate
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
You can also access:
Tutorials
Verification models
The ANSYS web site
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The ANSYS web site
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-47
Training Manual
On-Line Help
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are several ways to start the help system:
Launcher > Product Help
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Utility Menu > Help > Help Topics
Any dialog box > Help
Type HELP,name in the Input Window. Name is a command or
element name
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
element name.
On a PC, Start > Programs > ANSYS 10.0 > Help > ANSYS Help
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-48
Training Manual
On-Line Help
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Pressing the Product Help button on the launcher brings up a help browser
with:
a navigational window containing Table of Contents Index and a Search Utility
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
a navigational window containing Table of Contents, Index, and a Search Utility
a document window containing the help information.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-49
Training Manual
On-Line Help
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Use the Contents tab to browse
to the item of interest.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Use the Index tab to quickly
locate specific commands,
terminology, concepts, etc.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Use the Search tab to query the
entire help system for specific
words or phrases.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-50
Training Manual
On-Line Help
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
OO
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS also provides an
HTML-based on-line
tutorial.
The tutorial consists of
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The tutorial consists of
detailed instructions for
a set of problems solved
in ANSYS.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
To access the tutorial,
click on Utility Menu >
Help > ANSYS Tutorials.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-51
Training Manual
On-Line Help
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Launch the help system from the launcher
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Bring up an Analysis Guide
Type help,kplot in the Input window
Search for the string harmonic response
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-52
Training Manual
J. Workshop
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
W3 Getting Started Workshop
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
3-53
Chapter 4
ANSYS Basics
Training Manual
Chapter 4 - ANSYS Basics
A. Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Later in this course you will be using geometrical entities such as
volumes, areas, lines and keypoints as well as FEA entities such as
d d l t Thi h t i t d th f ll i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
nodes and elements. This chapter introduces the following
techniques used to display and manipulate those entities within the
GUI:
Plotting
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Plotting
Picking
Coordinate Systems
Select Logic
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Components and Assemblies
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-2
Training Manual
B. Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
It is often advantageous to plot only certain
entities in the model.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Within the Utility Menu > Plot, you will see
that geometric, finite element and other
entities can be plotted.
/replot
kplot
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
With Multi-Plots, a combination of entities
can be plotted.
kplot
lplot
aplot
vplot
nplot
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
p
eplot
gplot
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-3
Training Manual
Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The PlotCtrls menu is used to control how
the plot is displayed:
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
plot orientation
zoom
colors
symbols
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
symbols
annotation
animation
etc.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Among these, changing the plot
orientation (/VIEW) and zooming are the
most commonly used functions
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
most commonly used functions.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-4
Training Manual
Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The default view for a model is the front view:
looking down the +Z axis of the model. There
are several methods to change the model view
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
are several methods to change the model view.
Use dynamic mode a way to orient the plot
dynamically using the Control key and mouse
buttons
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
buttons.
Ctrl + Left mouse button pans the model.
Ctrl + Middle mouse button:
zooms the model c
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
spins the model (about screen Z)
Ctrl + Right mouse button rotates the model:
about screen X
about screen Y
P Z R
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Note, the Shift-Right button on a two-button
mouse is equivalent to the Middle mouse
P Z R Ctrl
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-5
ouse s equ a e t to t e dd e ouse
button on a three-button mouse.
Training Manual
Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Use the Model Control
Toolbar Icons to
h th i
Model Control Toolbar
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
change the view.
The Model Control
Toolbar also includes
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
a dynamic rotate
option.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Dynamic Model Mode Icon performs
same function as CTRL key.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-6
Training Manual
Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A Dynamic Mode setting is also
available using Pan-Zoom-Rotate .
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The same mouse button assignments
apply.
On 3-D graphics devices, you can also
dynamically orient the light source.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y y g
Useful for different light source shading
effects.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
When using 3-D driver
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-7
Training Manual
Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Other functions in the Pan-
Zoom-Rotate dialog box:
Front +Z view, from (0,0,1)
Back -Z view (0,0,-1)
T Y i (0 1 0)
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Preset views
Zoom-in on specific regions of
the model
Pan, zoom, or rotate in
Top +Y view (0,1,0)
Bot -Y view (0,-1,0)
Right +X view (1,0,0)
Left -X view (-1,0,0)
Iso Isometric (1,1,1)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Pan, zoom, or rotate in
discrete increments (as
specified by the Rate slider)
Rotation is about the
screen X Y Z coordinates
Obliq Oblique (1,2,3)
WP Working plane view
Z B i ki t f
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
screen X, Y, Z coordinates.
Fit the plot to the window
Reset everything to default
Zoom By picking center of a
square
Box Zoom By picking two corners
of a box
Win Zoom Same as Box Zoom,
b t b i ti l
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The majority of these options
are available in the Model
Control Toolbar.
but box is proportional
to window.
Back Up Unzoom to previous
zoom.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-8
Training Manual
Plotting
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Many of the plotting features are also available by right mouse clicking on
the graphics window.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-9
Training Manual
C. Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Picking
Pi ki ll t id tif d l titi
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Picking allows you to identify model entities
or locations by clicking in the Graphics
Window.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
A picking operation typically involves the
use of the mouse and a picker menu. It is
indicated by a + sign on the menu.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
For example, you can create keypoints by
picking locations in the Graphics Window
and then pressing OK in the picker.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-10
Training Manual
Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Two types of picking:
R t i l i ki
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Retrieval picking
Picking existing entities for a
subsequent operation.
Allows you to enter entity numbers
Example of
Locational Picker
Example of
Retrieval Picker
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y y
in the Picker Window.
Use the Pick All button to indicate
all entities.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Locational picking
Locating coordinates of a point,
such as a keypoint or node.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Allows you to enter coordinates in
the Picker Window.
Note, you must hit the <Enter> key
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-11
after entering information in the Picker
Window, then hit [OK] or [Apply].
Training Manual
Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Mouse button assignments for picking:
Left mouse button picks (or unpicks) the entity
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Left mouse button picks (or unpicks) the entity
or location closest to the mouse pointer.
Pressing and dragging allows you to preview
the item being picked (or unpicked).
Apply
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Middle mouse button does an Apply. Saves the
time required to move the mouse over to the
Picker and press the Apply button. Use Shift-
Right button on a two-button mouse
Pick
Toggle
Pick / Unpick
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Right button on a two-button mouse.
Right mouse button toggles between pick and
unpick mode.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Note, the Shift-Right button on a two-button mouse is
equivalent to the Middle mouse button on a three-button
mouse.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-12
Unpick
Pick
Cursor display:
Training Manual
Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Cannot use the Command Input area
to enter the values
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Type input followed by Enter, then [OK]
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-13
Prompt area indicates expected items
Training Manual
Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Hotspot locations for picking:
A d V l h h t t th t id f th
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Areas and Volumes have one hotspot near the centroid of the
solid model entity.
Lines have three hotspots - one in the middle and one near each
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
end.
Why this is important: When you are required to pick an
entity you must pick on the hotspot
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
entity, you must pick on the hotspot.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-14
Training Manual
Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Show locational picking by creating a few keypoints. Also show the
f iddl d i ht b tt
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
use of middle and right mouse buttons.
Show retrieval picking by creating a few lines
Show Loop by creating an AL area
Show Pick All by deleting area only
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Show Pick All by deleting area only
Do KPLOT, LPLOT, etc. with and without numbering. Type in a few of
these commands.
Show the use of pan-zoom-rotate
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-15
Training Manual
D. Coordinate Systems
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The ANSYS program has several types of coordinate systems, each used for a
different reason:
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Global and local coordinate systems are used to locate geometry
items (nodes, keypoints, etc.) in space.
The display coordinate system determines the system in which
geometry items are listed or displayed
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
geometry items are listed or displayed.
The nodal coordinate system defines the degree of freedom
directions at each node and the orientation of nodal results data.
(discussed in Chapter 9)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The element coordinate system determines the orientation of
material properties and element results data.
The results coordinate system is used to transform nodal or
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
element results data to a particular coordinate system for listings,
displays, or general postprocessing operations. (discussed in
Chapter 13)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-16
Training Manual
...Coordinate Systems
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Global Coordinate System
Th l b l f t f th d l
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The global reference system for the model.
May be Cartesian (system 0), cylindrical (1), or spherical (2).
For example, location (0,10,0) in global Cartesian is the same as
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
(10,90,0) in global Cylindrical.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-17
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Local Coordinate System
A d fi d t t d i d l ti ith ID
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A user-defined system at a desired location, with ID
number 11 or greater. The location may be:
At WP origin [CSWP]
At specified coordinates [LOCAL]
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
At existing keypoints [CSKP] or nodes [CS]
May be Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
May be rotated about X, Y, Z axes.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Y
Y
11
X
12
Y
12
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-18
X
X
11
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Display Coordinate System
C b h d t h d li t titi i lti l di t
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Can be changed to show and list entities in multiple coordinate
systems
Default is Global Cartesian
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Used mostly for listing and plotting models in non-Cartesian
systems. Is useful in only a few cases:
If li d i di l d i it li d i l di t t ( ith 1 0 0
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
If a cylinder is displayed in its cylindrical coordinate system (with a 1,0,0
view), it will be unrolled (developed) into a flat plane (with theta along
the Y direction).
DSYS,1 - List nodal coordinates in r,theta,z
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-19
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Defaults to global Cartesian
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Defaults to global Cartesian.
Use CSYS command (or Utility Menu >
WorkPlane > Change Active CS to) to change it
to
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
to
global Cartesian [csys,0]
global cylindrical [csys,1]
global spherical [csys 2]
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
global spherical [csys,2]
working plane [csys,4]
[csys,5] cylindrical coordinate system with Y as
the axis (X is in the global +X direction, local Y
i i th l b l Z di ti d l l Z (th
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
is in the global -Z direction, and local Z (the
cylindrical axis) is in the global +Y direction)
or a user-defined local coordinate system [csys,
n]
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-20
Used for geometry input and generation and
Select Logic (discussed next)
Training Manual
E. Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Suppose you wanted to do the following:
Plot all areas located in the second quadrant
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Delete all arcs of radius 0.2 to 0.3 units
Apply a convection load on all exterior lines
Write out all nodes at Z=3.5 to a file
View results only in elements made of steel
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
View results only in elements made of steel
The common theme in these tasks is that they all operate on a
subset of the model.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Select Logic allows you to select a subset of entities and operate
only on those entities.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-21
Training Manual
Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Three steps:
Select a subset
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Perform operations on the subset
Reactivate the full set
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Select subset
Operate on subset
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-22
Reactivate full set
Training Manual
Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Selecting Subsets
M t l ti t l
Entity to select
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Most selecting tools are
available in the Select Entities
dialog box: Utility Menu >
Select > Entities...
y
Criterion by
which to select
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Or you can use the xSEL
family of commands: KSEL,
LSEL ASEL VSEL NSEL
which to select
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
LSEL, ASEL, VSEL, NSEL,
ESEL
Type of
selection
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-23
Training Manual
Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Criterion by which to select:
By Num/Pick: to select based on entity numbers or by
i ki
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
picking
Attached to: to select based on attached entities. For
example, select all lines attached to the current subset
of areas.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
By Location: to select based on X,Y,Z location. For
example, select all nodes at X=2.5. X,Y,Z are interpreted
in the active coordinate system.
By Attributes: to select based on material number, real
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
By Attributes: to select based on material number, real
constant set number, etc. Different attributes are
available for different entities.
Exterior: to select entities lying on the exterior.
B R lt t l t titi b lt d t d l
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
By Results: to select entities by results data, e.g, nodal
displacements.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-24
Training Manual
Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Type of selection
From Full: selects a subset from
th f ll t f titi
g
F F ll
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the full set of entities.
Reselect: selects (again) a subset
from the current subset.
Also Select: adds another subset
Reselect
From Full
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
to the current subset.
Unselect: deactivates a portion of
the current subset.
Invert: toggles the active and
Also Select
Unselect
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Invert: toggles the active and
inactive subsets.
Select None: deactivates the full
set of entities.
Invert
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Select All: reactivates the full set
of entities.
Select None
Select All
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-25
Training Manual
Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Operations on the Subset
T i l ti l i l d li ti
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Typical operations are applying loads, listing
results for the subset, or simply plotting the
selected entities.
The advantage of having a subset selected is that
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The advantage of having a subset selected is that
you can use the [Pick All] button when the picker
prompts you pick desired entities. Or you can use
the ALL label when using commands.
Note that most operations in ANSYS including the
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Note that most operations in ANSYS, including the
SOLVE command, act on the currently selected
subset.
Another operation is to assign a name to the
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Another operation is to assign a name to the
selected subset by creating a component
(discussed in the next section).
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-26
Training Manual
Select Logic
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Reactivating the Full Set
Aft ll d i d ti d th l t d b t
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
After all desired operations are done on the selected subset, you
should reactivate the full set of entities.
If all nodes and all elements are not active for solution, the solver will
issue a warning to that effect.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
The easiest way to reactivate the full set is to select everything:
Utility Menu > Select > Everything
O i th d ALLSEL
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Or issue the command ALLSEL
You can also use the [Sele All] button in the Select Entities dialog
box to reactivate each entity set separately. (Or issue KSEL,ALL;
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
y p y ( , ;
LSEL,ALL; etc.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-27
Training Manual
F. Components
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Components are user-named subsets of entities. The name can
then be used in dialog boxes or commands in place of entity
numbers or the label ALL
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
numbers or the label ALL.
A group of nodes, or elements, or keypoints, or lines, or areas, or
volumes can be defined as a component. Only one entity type is
associated with a component
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
associated with a component.
Components can be selected or unselected. When you select a
component, you are actually selecting all of the entities in that
t
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
component.
Component Manager is used to Create,
Display, List and Select Components and
A bli
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Assemblies.
Utility Menu > Select > Component Manager...
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-28
Training Manual
Components
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Creating a component
Utility Menu > Select > Component Manager
Click on the Create Component Icon
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Click on the Create Component Icon
All of the currently selected entities will be included in the component, or you
can select (pick) the desired entities at this step.
Enter a name O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Up to 32 characters - letters, numbers, and _ (underscore) - are allowed
Beginning a component with _ (underscore) will make it a hidden
component and it cannot be picked from the list. This is NOT
recommended.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Suggestion: Use the first letter of the name to indicate the entity type. For
example, use N_HOLES for a node component.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-29
Training Manual
Components
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Creating an assembly
Highlight the components for the assembly
Click on the Create Assembly Icon and enter a name
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Click on the Create Assembly Icon and enter a name
Checking the box next to a component under the assembly number will also put a
component in an assembly
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
In the Component Manager above, N_OUTER and N_INNER are in the
ASSM_NODES (ASM1) assembly. ASSM_NODES is in the ASSM_2 (ASM2)
assembly.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-30
Training Manual
G. Workshop
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
WS4 ANSYS Basics
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
4-31
Chapter 5
General Analysis Procedure
Training Manual
Chapter 5 - General Analysis Procedure
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The objective of this chapter is outline a general analysis
procedure to be used to solve a simulation. Regardless of
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
procedure to be used to solve a simulation. Regardless of
the physics of the problem, the same general procedure can
be followed.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The problem on the following slide will be used to
demonstrate the general analysis procedure.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-2
Training Manual
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Given: A 1 thick spherical aluminum tank with a height of 180 and
radius of 100 tank is filled with water to a height of 80. The
l i ti E 10E6 P i 0 3
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
aluminum properties are E = 10E6 Psi, = 0.3.
100
A
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
1
100
100
A
Section Definition
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
80
3
163279 . 1
in
lbf
=
m
c
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Stress Convention
Section A-A
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-3
Question: Predict the membrane stress distributions in the
meridional (
m
) and circumferential (
c
) directions?
Stress Convention
Training Manual
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Every analysis involves four main steps:
Preliminary Decisions
Preliminary
Decisions
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Preliminary Decisions
Which analysis type?
What to model?
Which element type?
Decisions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Preprocessing
Define Material
Create or import the model geometry
M h th t
Preprocessing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Mesh the geometry
Solution
Apply loads
Solution
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Solve
Postprocessing
Review results
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-4
Check the validity of the solution
Postprocessing
Training Manual
Chapter 5 - A. Preliminary Decisions
Which analysis type?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y y
The analysis type usually belongs to one of the following
disciplines: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Structural Motion of solid bodies, pressure on solid bodies, or
contact of solid bodies
Thermal Applied heat, high temperatures, or changes in
temperature
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
Electromagnetic Devices subjected to electric currents (AC or DC),
electromagnetic waves, and voltage or charge
excitation
Fluid Motion of gases/fluids or contained gases/fluids
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Fluid Motion of gases/fluids, or contained gases/fluids
Coupled-Field Combinations of any of the above
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The appropriate analysis type for this model is a structural analysis!
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-5
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
What should be used to model the geometry of the spherical tank?
Axisymmetry since the loading, material, and the boundary
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
conditions are symmetric. This type of model would provide the
most simplified model.
Rotational symmetry since the loading, material, and the
boundary conditions are symmetric Advantage over
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
boundary conditions are symmetric. Advantage over
axisymmetry: offers some results away from applied boundary
conditions.
Full 3D model is an option, but would not be an efficient choice
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
p ,
compared to the axisymmetric and quarter symmetry models. If
model results are significantly influenced by symmetric
boundary conditions, this may be the only option.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
An axisymmetric and a one-quarter symmetry (i.e. rotational
symmetry) model will be analyzed for this model!
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-6
Training Manual
Which Element Type?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
What element type should be used for the model of the spherical
tank? O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Axisymmetric model:
Axisymmetric since 2-D section can be revolved to created 3D
geometry.
Linear due to small displacement assumption
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Linear due to small displacement assumption.
PLANE42 with KEYOPT(3) = 1
Rotational symmetry model:
Shell since radius/thickness ratio > 10
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Shell since radius/thickness ratio 10
Linear due to small displacement assumption.
membrane stiffness only option since membrane stresses are
required.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
SHELL63 with KEYOPT(1) = 1
Since the meshing of this geometry will create SHELL63 elements
with shape warnings, a mid-side noded equation of the SHELL63 was
used:
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-7
used:
SHELL93
Training Manual
Chapter 5 - B. Preprocessing
Create the Solid Model
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A typical solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines, and
keypoints. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Volumes are bounded by areas. They represent solid objects.
Areas are bounded by lines. They represent faces of solid objects, or
planar or shell objects.
Lines are bounded by keypoints. They represent edges of objects.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Lines are bounded by keypoints. They represent edges of objects.
Keypoints are locations in 3-D space. They represent vertices of
objects.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Volumes
Areas Lines & Keypoints
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-8
Volumes
Areas Lines & Keypoints
Training Manual
Create the Solid Model
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
What geometry should be used to model the spherical tank?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-9
One-quarter Symmetry Model
Axisymmetric model
Training Manual
Create the FEA Model
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Meshing is the process used to fill the solid model with nodes
and elements, i.e, to create the FEA model. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Remember, you need nodes and elements for the finite element
solution, not just the solid model. The solid model does NOT
participate in the finite element solution.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
meshing
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Solid model FEA model
meshing
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-10
Training Manual
Create the FEA Model
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
What would the mesh of the spherical tank look like?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-11
Axisymmetric model
Training Manual
Define Material
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Material Properties
E l i i t i l t i t Y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Every analysis requires some material property input: Youngs
modulus EX for structural elements, thermal conductivity KXX for
thermal elements, etc.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
There are two ways to define material properties:
Material library
Individual properties
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-12
Training Manual
Chapter 5 C. Solution
Define Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are five categories of loads:
DOF Constraints Specified DOF values, such as displacements
i t l i t t i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
in a stress analysis or temperatures in a
thermal analysis.
Concentrated Loads Point loads, such as forces or heat flow rates.
Surface Loads Loads distributed over a surface, such as
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
,
pressures or convections.
Body Loads Volumetric or field loads, such as temperatures
(causing thermal expansion) or internal heat
generation.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
generation.
Inertia Loads Loads due to structural mass or inertia, such
as gravity and rotational velocity.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-13
Training Manual
Chapter 5 C. Solution
Define Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Edge Symmetry
T ti l
What are the loads on the spherical tank models?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
g y y
constraint
Tangential
Constraint*
Tangential
Constraint*
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Hydrostatic
pressure
Edge Symmetry
constraint
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Hydrostatic
pressure
constraint
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Edge Symmetry
constraint
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-14
Axisymmetric model
constraint
* Tangential constraint used to allow comparison to Roarke closed form solution.
Training Manual
Chapter 5 - D. Postprocessing
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Postprocessing is the final step in the finite element analysis
process. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
It is imperative that you interpret your results relative to the
assumptions made during model creation and solution.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
You may be required to make design decisions based on the
results, so it is a good idea not only to review the results carefully,
but also to check the validity of the solution.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS has two postprocessors:
POST1, the General Postprocessor, to review a single set of results
over the entire model.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
POST26, the Time-History Postprocessor, to review results at selected
points in the model over time. Mainly used for transient and nonlinear
analyses. (Not discussed in this course.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-15
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
What are the circumferential stress results in the spherical tank
models?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-16
Axisymmetric model
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
What are the meridional stress results in the spherical tank
models?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-17
Axisymmetric model
Training Manual
Verification
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
It is always a good idea to do a sanity check and make sure that
the solution is acceptable. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
What you need to check depends on the type of problem you are
solving, but here are some typical questions to ask:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Do the reaction forces balance the applied loads?
Where is the maximum stress located?
If it i t i l it h i t l d t t th
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
If it is at a singularity, such as a point load or a re-entrant corner, the
value is generally meaningless.
Are the stress values beyond the elastic limit?
If so, the load magnitudes may be wrong, or you may need to do a
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
, g y g, y y
nonlinear analysis.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-18
Training Manual
Verification
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
How do the ANSYS results compare with Roarke?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Membrane Stress Distributions for Axisymmetric Model
140
160
180
Membrane Stress Distributions for Quarter Symmetry Model
140
160
180
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
80
100
120
140
y

(
i
n
c
h
e
s
)
80
100
120
140
y

(
i
n
c
h
e
s
)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
0
20
40
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Circumferential Stress (Roarke)
Circumferential Stress (Axisymmetric)
Meridional Stress (Roarke)
Meridional Stress (Axisymmetric)
y
0
20
40
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Circumferential Stress (Roarke)
Circumferential (quarter symmetry)
Meridional Stress (Roarke)
Meridional Stress (quarter symmetry)
y
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
-
1
0
0
-
8
0
-
6
0
-
4
0
-
2
0
2
0
4
0
6
0
8
0
1
0
0
Stress (Psi)
-
1
0
0
-
8
0
-
6
0
-
4
0
-
2
0
2
0
4
0
6
0
8
0
1
0
0
Stress (Psi)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
5-19
Axisymmetric model
Chapter 6
Creating the Solid Model
Training Manual
Chapter 6 Creating the Solid Model
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The purpose of this chapter is to review some preliminary
modeling considerations, discuss how to import ones geometry
i t ANSYS d fi ll i t d h t t t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
into ANSYS, and finally introduce how to create ones geometry
using ANSYS native commands.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-2
Training Manual
Chapter 6 Creating the Solid Model
A. What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Many modeling decisions must be made before building an
analysis model: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
How much detail should be included?
Does symmetry apply?
Will the model contain stress singularities?
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-3
Training Manual
Chapter 6 A. What to Model
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Details
S ll d t il th t i t t t th l i h ld t b
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Small details that are unimportant to the analysis should not be
included in the analysis model. You can suppress such features
before sending a model to ANSYS from a CAD system.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
For some structures, however, "small" details such as fillets or
holes can be locations of maximum stress and might be quite
important, depending on your analysis objectives.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-4
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Symmetry
M t t t i i f d ll l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Many structures are symmetric in some form and allow only a
representative portion or cross-section to be modeled.
The main advantages of using a symmetric model are:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g y
It is generally easier to create the model.
It allows you to make a finer, more detailed model and thereby obtain
better results than would have been possible with the full model.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-5
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To take advantage of symmetry, all of the following must be
symmetric: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Geometry
Material properties
Loading conditions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
There are different types of symmetry:
Axisymmetry
Rotational
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Planar or reflective
Repetitive or translational
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-6
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Axisymmetry
S t b t t l i h i li ht b lb t i ht
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Symmetry about a central axis, such as in light bulbs, straight
pipes, cones, circular plates, and domes.
Plane of symmetry is the cross-section anywhere around the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y y y
structure. Thus you are using a single 2-D slice to represent
360 a real savings in model size!
Loading is also assumed to be
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Loading is also assumed to be
axisymmetric in most cases. However,
if it is not, and if the analysis is linear,
the loads can be separated into
h i t f i d d t
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
harmonic components for independent
solutions that can be superimposed.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-7
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Rotational symmetry
R t d t d b t t l i h i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Repeated segments arranged about a central axis, such as in
turbine rotors.
Only one segment of the structure needs to be modeled.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y g
Loading is also assumed to be symmetric about the axis.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-8
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Planar or reflective symmetry
O h lf f th t t i i i f th th h lf Th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
One half of the structure is a mirror image of the other half. The
mirror is the plane of symmetry.
Loading may be symmetric or anti-symmetric about the plane of
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g y y y p
symmetry.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
This model illustrates
both reflective and
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
rotational symmetry
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-9
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Repetitive or translational symmetry
R t d t d l t i ht li h l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Repeated segments arranged along a straight line, such as a long
pipe with evenly spaced cooling fins.
Loading is also assumed to be repeated along the length of the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p g g
model.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
This model illustrates both repetitive and reflective symmetry.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-10
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In some cases, only a few minor details will disrupt a structure's
symmetry. You may be able to ignore such details (or treat them
b i t i ) i d t i th b fit f i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
as being symmetric) in order to gain the benefits of using a
smaller model. How much accuracy is lost as the result of such a
compromise might be difficult to estimate.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-11
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Stress singularities
A t i l it i l ti i fi it l t d l h
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A stress singularity is a location in a finite element model where
the stress value is unbounded (infinite). Examples:
A point load, such as an applied force or moment
An isolated constraint point, where the reaction force behaves like a
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
An isolated constraint point, where the reaction force behaves like a
point load
A sharp re-entrant corner (with zero fillet radius)
A th h d it i fi d t
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
As the mesh density is refined at
a stress singularity, the stress value
increases and never converges.
P = P/A
As A 0,
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-12
Training Manual
What to model?
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Real structures do not contain stress singularities. They are a
fiction created by the simplifying assumptions of the model. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
So how do you deal with stress singularities?
If they are located far away from the region of interest, you can simply
ignore them by deactivating the affected zone while reviewing results.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g y g g
If they are located in the region of interest, you will need to take
corrective action, such as:
adding a fillet at re-entrant corners and rerunning the analysis.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
replacing a point force with an equivalent pressure load.
spreading out displacement constraints over a set of nodes.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-13
Training Manual
Chapter 6 B. Importing Geometry
B. IGES Imports
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Importing an IGES file
Utility Menu > File > Import > IGES
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the two methods, No Defeaturing and Defeaturing
the Merge, Solid, and Small options
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-14
Training Manual
Connection Products
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
IGES importing works quite well, but because of the dual
translation process CAD IGES ANSYS there are many
h 100% t l ti i t hi d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
cases when a 100% translation is not achieved.
ANSYS Connection products help overcome this problem by
directly reading the native part files produced by the CAD
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y g p p y
package:
Connection for Pro/ENGINEER (Pro/E for short)
Connection for Unigraphics (UG for short)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Connection for SAT
Connection for Parasolid
Connection for CATIA
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
To use a connection product, you need to purchase the
appropriate license.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-15
Training Manual
Connection Products
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Connection for SAT
Reads .sat file produced by CAD packages that use the ACIS modeler.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Does not require ACIS software.
Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT...
Or ~satin
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Option to read only
selected geometry types
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Defeaturing option available
No Defeaturing is default
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-16
Training Manual
Connection Products
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Connection for Parasolid
Reads .x_t or .xmt_txt file produced by CAD packages that use the
P lid d l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Parasolid modeler.
Does not require Parasolid software.
Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA...
Or ~parain
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Or parain
Option to read only
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Defeaturing option available
N D f t i i d f lt
p y
selected geometry types
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
No Defeaturing is default
Option to scale geometry
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-17
Training Manual
Connection Products
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The importing procedure from other CAD systems is similar. See the
Connection Users Guide for detailed instructions for each CAD system.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Supported CAD systems on Windows:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Supported CAD systems on UNIX:
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-18
Training Manual
Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
W6A. Importing Geometry IGES Import
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W6B. Importing Geometry SAT Part Import
W6C. Importing Geometry SAT Assembly Import
W6D. Importing Geometry Parasolid Part Import
W6E Importing Geometry Parasolid Assembly Import
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
W6E. Importing Geometry Parasolid Assembly Import
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-19
Training Manual
Chapter 6 C. ANSYS Native Commands
C. Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Importing geometry is convenient, but sometimes you may need
to create it in ANSYS. Some possible reasons: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You may need to build a parametric model one defined in terms of
variables for later use in design optimization or sensitivity studies.
The geometry may not be available in a format ANSYS can read.
The Connection product you need may not be available on your
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
computer platform.
You may need to modify or add geometry to an imported part or
assembly.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS has an extensive set of geometry creation tools, which we
will introduce next.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-20
Training Manual
Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Solid Modeling can be defined as the process of
creating solid models. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Definitions:
A solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines,
and keypoints.
Volumes
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
yp
Volumes are bounded by areas, areas by lines, and
lines by keypoints.
Hierarchy of entities from low to high:
k i t li l
Areas
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
keypoints < lines < areas < volumes
You cannot delete an entity if a higher-order entity
is attached to it.
Lines &
Keypoints
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Also, a model with just areas and below, such as
a shell or 2-D plane model, is still considered a
solid model in ANSYS terminology.
Keypoints
Lines
Areas
Volumes
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-21
Keypoints
Training Manual
Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are two approaches to creating a solid model:
Top-down
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Bottom-up
Top-down modeling starts with a definition of volumes (or areas),
which are then combined in some fashion to create the final
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
shape.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
add
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-22
Training Manual
Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Bottom-up modeling starts with keypoints, from which you build
up lines, areas, etc. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
You may choose whichever approach best suits the shape of the
model, and also freely combine both methods.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The top-down and bottom-up modeling approaches are not
discussed here, but are described in detail in the Appendix.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-23
Training Manual
Chapter 6 D. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation
D. Working Plane
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The WP in the prompts and in the picker stands for Working
Plane a movable, 2-D reference plane used to locate and orient
i iti
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
primitives.
By default, the WP origin coincides with the global origin, but you can
move it and/or rotate it to any desired position.
By displaying a grid, you can use the WP as a drawing tablet.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y p y g g , y g
WP is infinite despite the grid settings.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
WY
WX
WY
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
X2
X1
Y2
Y1
WP (X Y)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-24
WX
Y1
WP (X,Y)
Training Manual
Working Plane
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
All working plane controls are in
Utility Menu > WorkPlane.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The WP Settings menu controls the
following:
WP display - triad only (default), grid only, or
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
WP display triad only (default), grid only, or
both.
Snap - allows you to pick locations on the WP
easily by snapping the cursor to the nearest
grid point
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
grid point.
Grid spacing - the distance between grid
lines.
Grid size - how much of the (infinite) working
l i di l d
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
plane is displayed.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-25
Training Manual
Working Plane
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
You can move the working plane
to any desired position using
th Off t d Ali
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the Offset and Align menus.
Offset WP by Increments
Use the push buttons (with
increment set by slider).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
increment set by slider).
Or type in the desired
increments.
Or use dynamic mode
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
(similar to pan-zoom-rotate).
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-26
Training Manual
Working Plane
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Offset WP to >
This simply translates the WP,
maintaining its current orientation to
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
maintaining its current orientation, to
the desired destination, which can be:
Existing keypoint(s). Picking
multiple keypoints moves WP to
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
their average location.
Existing node(s).
Coordinate location(s).
Gl b l i i
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Global origin.
Origin of the active coordinate
system (discussed later).
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-27
Training Manual
Working Plane
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Align WP with >
This reorients the WP.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
For example, Align WP with Keypoints
prompts you to pick 3 keypoints -
one at the origin, one to define the
X-axis, and one to define the X-Y
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
plane.
To return the WP to its default
position (at global origin, on global
X-Y plane), click on Align WP with >
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
p ), g
Global Cartesian.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-28
Training Manual
Working Plane
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Clear the database
Display WP and create a few keypoints by picking Note the coordinates
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Display WP and create a few keypoints by picking. Note the coordinates
displayed in the picker.
Turn on the grid, change spacing, and activate snap.
Create more keypoints. Note how the cursor snaps to grid points.
Define 2 rectangles one by picking corners and one by dimensions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Define 2 rectangles one by picking corners and one by dimensions.
Now offset WP to average of a few keypoints, then rotate in-plane by 30.
Define 2 more rectangles by picking and by dimensions. Note the change in
rectangle orientation.
Align WP with global origin then define some 3 D primitives Use picking as well
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Align WP with global origin, then define some 3-D primitives. Use picking as well
as By dimensions.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-29
Training Manual
Chapter 6 E. ANSYS Coordinate Systems
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
D f lt t l b l C t i
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Defaults to global Cartesian.
Use CSYS command (or Utility Menu
> WorkPlane > Change Active CS to) to
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g )
change it to
global Cartesian [csys,0]
global cylindrical [csys,1]
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
global spherical [csys,2]
working plane [csys,4]
or a user-defined local coordinate
system [csys, n]
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
system [csys, n]
Each of these systems is explained
next.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-30
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Th l b l f t f th d l
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The global reference system for the model.
May be Cartesian (system 0), cylindrical (1), or spherical (2).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
(10,90,0) in global Cylindrical.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-31
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A d fi d t t d i d l ti ith ID
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A user-defined system at a desired location, with ID
number 11 or greater. The location may be:
At WP origin [CSWP]
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
At existing keypoints [CSKP] or nodes [CS]
May be Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
May be rotated about X, Y, Z axes.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Y
Y
11
X
12
Y
12
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-32
X
X
11
Training Manual
Working Plane Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Working Plane Coordinate System
Att h d t th ki l
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Attached to the working plane.
Used mainly to locate and orient solid model primitives.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
You can also use the working plane to define keypoints by
picking.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-33
Training Manual
CSYS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
You can define any number of
coordinate systems, but only one
may be active at any given time
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
may be active at any given time.
Several geometry items are affected
by the coordinate system [CSYS] that
is active at the time they are defined:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
is active at the time they are defined:
Keypoint and node locations
Line curvature
Area curvature
G ti d filli f k i t
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Generation and filling of keypoints
and nodes
Etc.
The graphics window title shows the
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The graphics window title shows the
active system.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-34
Areas created between keypoints at
(1,0,0), (0,1,0), & (0,0,1)
Training Manual
Active Coordinate System Demo
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Clear the database
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Create 5 keypoints at (1,2), (3,2), (4,0), (1,1.5), (2.5,0)
Switch to CSYS,1 and create a line in active CS between KP4 & KP5
Switch back to CSYS,0 and create an area through KPs. Notice that
the remaining lines were automatically generated lines all of them
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
the remaining lines were automatically generated lines, all of them
straight.
Define two circles:
0.3R, centered at (2.25,1.5)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
0.35R, centered at (3.0,0.6)
Subtract the two circles from base area. (We have used a combination
of bottom-up and top-down modeling.)
Save as r db
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Save as r.db
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
6-35
Chapter 7
Create Finite Element Model
Training Manual
Chapter 7 Creating the Finite Element Model
A. Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The purpose of this chapter is to discuss the meshing element
attributes, various means to create a mesh in ANSYS, and finally
h t i t fi it l t d l di tl i t ANSYS
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
how to import ones finite element model directly into ANSYS.
Recall, ANSYS does not use the solid model in the solution of the
model, rather it needs to use finite elements.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-2
Training Manual
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Meshing is the process used to fill the solid model with nodes
and elements, i.e, to create the FEA model. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Remember, you need nodes and elements for the finite element
solution, not just the solid model. The solid model does NOT
participate in the finite element solution.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
meshing
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Solid model FEA model
meshing
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-3
Training Manual
B. Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are three steps to meshing:
Define element attributes
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Specify mesh controls
Generate the mesh
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Element attributes are characteristics of the finite element model
that you must establish prior to meshing. They can include:
Element types
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Real constants
Material properties
Section properties
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-4
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element Type
Th l t t i i t t h i th t d t i th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The element type is an important choice that determines the
following element characteristics:
Degree of Freedom (DOF) set. A thermal element type, for example,
has one dof: TEMP, whereas a structural element type may have up to
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
, yp y p
six dof: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ.
Element shape -- brick, tetrahedron, quadrilateral, triangle, etc.
Dimensionality -- 2-D (X-Y plane only), or 3-D.
A d di l t h li d ti
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Assumed displacement shape -- linear vs. quadratic.
ANSYS has a library of over 170 element types from which you
can choose. Details on how to choose the correct element type
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
yp
will be presented later. For now, lets see how to define an
element type.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-5
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element category
ANSYS ff diff t t i f l t S f th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS offers many different categories of elements. Some of the
commonly used ones are:
Line elements
Shells
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Shells
2-D solids
3-D solids
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-6
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Line elements:
Beam elements are used to model bolts, tubular members, C-sections,
l i l l d b h l b d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
angle irons, or any long, slender members where only membrane and
bending stresses are needed.
Link elements are used to model springs, bolts, preloaded bolts, and
truss members.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Spring (combination) elements are used to model springs, bolts, or
long slender parts, or to replace complex parts by an equivalent
stiffness.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-7
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Shell elements:
Used to model thin panels or curved surfaces.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The definition of thin depends on the application, but as a general
guideline, the major dimensions of the shell structure (panel) should
be at least 10 times its thickness.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-8
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
2-D Solid elements:
Used to model a cross-section of solid objects.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Must be modeled in the global Cartesian X-Y plane.
All loads are in the X-Y plane, and the response (displacements) are
also in the X-Y plane.
Element behavior may be one of the following:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Element behavior may be one of the following:
plane stress
plane strain
generalized plain strain
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
generalized plain strain
axisymmetric
axisymmetric harmonic
Y
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Y
X
Z
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-9
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Plane stress assumes zero stress in
the Z direction. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Valid for components in which the Z
dimension is smaller than the X and Y
dimensions.
Z-strain is non-zero.
Y
X
Z
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Optional thickness (Z direction)
allowed.
Used for structures such as flat plates
subjected to in-plane loading or thin
X
Z
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
subjected to in-plane loading, or thin
disks under pressure or centrifugal
loading.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-10
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Plane strain assumes zero strain in the Z
direction. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Valid for components in which the Z dimension is
much larger than the X and Y dimensions.
Z-stress is non-zero.
Used for long constant cross-section structures
Z
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Used for long, constant cross-section structures
such as structural beams.
Y
X
Z
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-11
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Generalized Plane Strain assumes a finite deformation domain
length in the Z direction, as opposed to the infinite value assumed
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
for standard plane strain.
Gives more practical results for deformation problems where the Z-
direction dimension is not long enough.
Gives users a more efficient way to simulate certain 3-D deformations
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Gives users a more efficient way to simulate certain 3-D deformations
using 2-D element options.
Option is a feature developed for PLANE182 and PLANE183.
The deformation domain or structure
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
is formed by extruding a plane area
along a curve with a constant curvature.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-12
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Axisymmetry assumes that the 3-D model and its
loading can be generated by revolving a 2-D
ti 360 b t th Y i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
section 360 about the Y axis.
Axis of symmetry must coincide with the global Y
axis.
Negative X coordinates are not permitted.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p
Y direction is axial, X direction is radial, and Z
direction is circumferential (hoop) direction.
Hoop displacement is zero; hoop strains and
stresses are usually very significant
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
stresses are usually very significant.
Used for pressure vessels, straight pipes, shafts,
etc.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-13
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Axisymmetric harmonic is a special case of axisymmetry where
the loads can be non-axisymmetric. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The non-axisymmetric loading is decomposed into Fourier series
components, applied and solved separately, and then combined later.
No approximation is introduced by this simplification!
Used for non-axisymmetric loads such as torque on a shaft.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y q
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-14
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
3-D Solid elements:
Used for structures which, because of geometry, materials, loading, or
d t il f i d lt t b d l d ith i l l t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
detail of required results, cannot be modeled with simpler elements.
Also used when the model geometry is transferred from a 3-D CAD
system, and a large amount of time and effort is required to convert it
to a 2-D or shell form.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-15
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element Order
El t d f t th l i l d f th l t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Element order refers to the polynomial order of the elements
shape functions.
What is a shape function?
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
It is a mathematical function that gives the shape of the results
within the element. Since FEA solves for DOF values only at nodes,
we need the shape function to map the nodal DOF values to points
within the element
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
within the element.
The shape function represents assumed behavior for a given element.
How well each assumed element shape function matches the true
behavior directly affects the accuracy of the solution, as shown on the
t lid
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
next slide.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-16
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Quadratic distribution of
Linear approximation
(Poor Results) O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Quadratic distribution of
DOF values
Actual quadratic
curve
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Quadratic approximation
(Best Results)
Linear approximation
with multiple elements
(Better Results)
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
(Best Results)
(Better Results)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-17
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
When you choose an element type, you are implicitly choosing
and accepting the element shape function assumed for that
l t t Th f h k th h f ti i f ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
element type. Therefore, check the shape function information
before you choose an element type.
Typically, a linear element has only corner nodes, whereas a
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
yp y, y ,
quadratic element also has midside nodes.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-18
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Linear elements
Can support only a linear variation of
Quadratic elements
Can support a quadratic variation of
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
pp y
displacement and therefore (mostly)
only a constant state of stress within a
single element.
Highly sensitive to element distortion
pp q
displacement and therefore a linear
variation of stress within a single
element.
Can represent curved edges and
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Highly sensitive to element distortion.
Acceptable if you are only interested
in nominal stress results.
Can represent curved edges and
surfaces more accurately than linear
elements. Not as sensitive to element
distortion.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Need to use a large number of
elements to resolve high stress
gradients.
Recommended if you are interested in
highly accurate stresses.
Give better results than linear
elements in many cases with fewer
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
elements, in many cases with fewer
number of elements and total DOF.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-19
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Notes:
For shell models, the difference between linear and quadratic
l t i t d ti f lid d l Li h ll
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
elements is not as dramatic as for solid models. Linear shells are
therefore usually preferred.
Besides linear and quadratic elements, a third kind is available, known
as p-elements. P-elements can support anywhere from a quadratic to
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
an 8th-order variation of displacement within a single element and
include automatic solution convergence controls.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-20
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Mesh Density
Th f d t l i f FEA i th t th b f
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The fundamental premise of FEA is that as the number of
elements (mesh density) is increased, the solution gets closer and
closer to the true solution.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
However, solution time and computer resources required also
increase dramatically as you increase the number of elements.
The objectives of the analysis usually decide which way the slider
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The objectives of the analysis usually decide which way the slider
bar below should be moved.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-21
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Stress Analyses:
If you are interested in highly accurate stresses:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A fine mesh will be needed, omitting no geometric details at any
location in the structure where such accuracy is needed.
Stress convergence should be demonstrated.
Any simplification anywhere in the model might introduce
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Any simplification anywhere in the model might introduce
significant error.
If you are interested in deflections or nominal stresses:
A relatively coarse mesh is sufficient.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
y
Small geometry details may be omitted.
Thermal Analyses:
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Small details can usually be omitted, but since many thermal analyses
are followed by a stress analysis, stress considerations generally
dictate the detail of the model.
Mesh density is usually determined by expected thermal gradients. A
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-22
y y y g
fine mesh is required for high thermal gradients, whereas a coarse
mesh may be sufficient for low gradients.
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To define an element type:
Main Menu > Preprocessor >
El t T > Add/Edit/D l t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete
[Add] to add new element type
Choose the desired type
(such as SOLID92) and press
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
(such as SOLID92) and press
OK
[Options] to specify additional
element options
O th ET d
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Or use the ET command:
et,1,solid92
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-23
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Notes:
Setting preferences to the desired discipline (Main Menu > Preferences)
ill h l th l t t lid f th t di i li
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
will show only the element types valid for that discipline.
You should define the element type early in the preprocessing phase
because many of the menu choices in the GUI are filtered out based
on the current DOF set. For example, if you choose a structural
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
element type, thermal load choices will not be not shown at all.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-24
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Real Constants and Section Properties:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Used for geometric properties that cannot be completely defined
by the elements geometry. For example:
A beam element is defined by a line joining two nodes. This defines
only the length of the beam To specify the beams cross-sectional
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
only the length of the beam. To specify the beam s cross-sectional
properties, such as the area, moment of inertia or dimensions, you
need to use real constants or section properties.
A shell element is defined by a quadrilateral or triangular area. This
defines only the surface area of the shell To specify the shell
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
defines only the surface area of the shell. To specify the shell
thickness or layers, you need to use real constants or section
properties.
Most 3-D solid elements do not require a real constant since the
l t t i f ll d fi d b it d
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
element geometry is fully defined by its nodes.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-25
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To define real constants:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Real
C t t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Constants
[Add] to add a new real constant
set.
If multiple element types have
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
If multiple element types have
been defined, choose the element
type for which you are specifying
real constants.
Then enter the real constant
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Then enter the real constant
values.
Or use the R family of commands.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Different element types require
different real constants. Check the
Elements Manual, available on-line,
for details
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-26
for details.
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To define section properties:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Sections
Abilit t I t S ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Ability to Import Sections
Beam, Shell and Pretension sections can
be created.
Or use the SECxxx family of commands
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Or use the SECxxx family of commands.
Different element types require different
section properties. See the Elements
M l f d t il
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Manual for details.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-27
Training Manual
Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Material Properties
E l i i t i l t i t Y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Every analysis requires some material property input: Youngs
modulus EX for structural elements, thermal conductivity KXX for
thermal elements, etc.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Refer to Chapter 8 for details on the two ways to define material
properties.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-28
Training Manual
C. Multiple Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Most FEA models have multiple attributes. For example, the silo shown
here has two element types, three real constant sets, and two materials.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
TYPE 1 = shell
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
MAT 1 = concrete
MAT 2 = steel
TYPE 1 shell
TYPE 2 = beam
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
REAL 1 = 3/8 thickness
REAL 2 = beam properties
REAL 3 = 1/8 thickness P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-29
Training Manual
Multiple Element Attributes
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Whenever you have multiple TYPEs, REALs, MATs and SECNUMs,
you need to make sure that each element is assigned the proper
tt ib t Th th t d thi
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
attributes. There are three ways to do this:
Assign attributes to the solid model entities before meshing
Activate a global setting of TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUM before
meshing
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
Modify element attributes after meshing
If no assignments are made, ANSYS uses default settings of
TYPE 1 REAL 1 MAT 1 d SECNUM 1 f ll l t i th
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
TYPE=1, REAL=1, MAT=1 and SECNUM=1 for all elements in the
model. Note, the current active setting dictates mesh operation.
Good practice is to use the same number for TYPE, REAL, MAT
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
p , ,
and SECNUM for a given part.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-30
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Assigning Attributes to the Solid Model
1 Define all necessary element types materials and
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Define all necessary element types, materials, and
real constant sets.
2. Then use the Element Attributes section of the
MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool):
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool):
Choose entity type and press the SET button.
Pick the entities to which you want to assign
attributes.
Set the appropriate attributes in the subsequent
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Set the appropriate attributes in the subsequent
dialog box.
Or select the desired entities and use the VATT,
AATT, LATT, or KATT command.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
AATT, LATT, or KATT command.
3. When you mesh an entity, its attributes are
automatically transferred to the elements.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-31
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Using Global Attribute Settings
1 Define all necessary element types
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Define all necessary element types,
materials, real constant sets and section
numbers
2 Then use the Element Attributes section
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
2. Then use the Element Attributes section
of the MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor
> MeshTool):
Choose Global and press the SET button.
Activate the desired combination of attributes
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Activate the desired combination of attributes
in the Meshing Attributes dialog box. We
refer to these as the active TYPE, REAL, MAT
and SECNUM settings.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Or use the TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUM
commands.
3. Mesh only those entities to which the above
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-32
y
settings apply.
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Modifying Element Attributes
1 Define all necessary element types materials and real constant
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Define all necessary element types, materials, and real constant
sets.
2. Activate the desired combination of TYPE, REAL, MAT, and
SECNUM settings
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
SECNUM settings:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesh Attributes > Default Attribs
Or use the TYPE, REAL, MAT and SECNUM commands
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
3. Modify the attributes of only those elements to which the above
settings apply:
Issue EMODIF,PICK or choose Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling >
Move/Modify > Elements > Modify Attrib
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
y y
Then pick the desired elements
4. In the subsequent dialog box,
set attributes to All to current.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-33
set attributes to All to current.
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Some points to keep in mind:
You can verify element attributes by activating
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You can verify element attributes by activating
attribute numbering:
Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering
Or /PNUM,attr,ON, where attr may be TYPE,
REAL MAT or SECNUM
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
REAL, MAT or SECNUM
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Element attributes assigned directly to solid model entities will override
the default attribute pointers.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
By assigning attributes to solid model entities, you can avoid having to
reset attributes in the middle of meshing operations. This is
advantageous because ANSYS meshing algorithms are most efficient
when meshing all entities at once.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-34
g
Clearing a solid model entity of its mesh will not delete attribute
assignments.
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume ribgeom.db
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
List element types, real constants, and materials. One of each has
been defined.
Bring up MeshTool, choose area attributes, and press Set
Pick the single area show the Area Attributes dialog box and press
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Pick the single area, show the Area Attributes dialog box, and press
OK. (There is only one set of attributes, but this illustrates the general
procedure.)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-35
Training Manual
D. Workshop
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
W7A. Silo
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-36
Training Manual
E. Controlling Mesh Density
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS provides many tools to control mesh density, both on a
global and local level:
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Global controls
SmartSizing
Global element sizing
D f lt i i
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Default sizing
Local controls
Keypoint sizing
Line sizing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Line sizing
Area sizing
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-37
Training Manual
Controlling Mesh Density
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
SmartSizing
D t i l t i b i i di i i ll li
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Determines element sizes by assigning divisions on all lines,
taking into account curvature of the line, its proximity to holes and
other features, and element order.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
SmartSizing is off by default, but is recommended for free
meshing. It does not affect mapped meshing. (Free meshing vs.
mapped meshing will be discussed later.)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-38
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To use SmartSizing:
Bring up the MeshTool (Main Menu > Preprocessor >
M hi M hT l) t S tSi i d t th
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Meshing > MeshTool), turn on SmartSizing, and set the
desired size level.
Or use SMRT,level
Size level ranges from 1 (very fine) to 10 (very
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Size level ranges from 1 (very fine) to 10 (very
coarse). Defaults to 6.
Then mesh all volumes (or all areas) at once, rather than
one-by-one.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-39
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Examples of different SmartSize
levels are shown here for a
tetrahedron mesh
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
tetrahedron mesh.
Advanced SmartSize controls, such
as mesh expansion and transition
factors are available on the SMRT
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
factors, are available on the SMRT
command or:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing >
Size Cntrls > SmartSize > Adv Opts
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
You can turn off SmartSizing using
the MeshTool or by issuing smrt,off.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-40
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Global Element Sizing
Allows you to specify a maximum element edge length
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Allows you to specify a maximum element edge length
for the entire model (or number of divisions per line):
ESIZE,SIZE
or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then
select Size Controls, Global ,and [Set]
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls >
ManualSize > Global > Size
Can be used by itself or in conjunction with
SmartSizing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
SmartSizing.
Using ESIZE by itself (SmartSizing off) will
result in a uniform element size throughout the
volume (or area) being meshed.
With SmartSizing on, ESIZE acts as a guide,
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
With SmartSizing on, ESIZE acts as a guide,
but the specified size may be overridden to
accommodate line curvature or proximity to
features.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-41
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Default Sizing
If d t if t l ANSYS d f lt i i hi h
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
If you dont specify any controls, ANSYS uses default sizing, which
assigns minimum and maximum line divisions, aspect ratio, etc. based
on element order.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Meant for mapped meshing, but is also used for free meshing if
SmartSizing is off.
You can adjust default size specifications using DESIZE or
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
You can adjust default size specifications using DESIZE or
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > ManualSize > Global > Other
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-42
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Keypoint Sizing
C t l l t i t k i t
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Controls element size at keypoints:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then
select Size Controls, Keypt, and [Set]
or KESIZE command
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ManualSize > Keypoints
Different keypoints can have different KESIZEs giving
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Different keypoints can have different KESIZEs, giving
you more control over the mesh.
Useful for stress concentration regions.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1 Specified sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing to
accommodate line curvature or proximity to features.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-43
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Line Sizing
Controls element size at lines:
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool;
then select Size Controls, Lines, and [Set]
or LESIZE command
or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p g
> ManualSize> Lines
Different lines can have different LESIZEs.
Size specifications may be hard or soft
Yes for soft
No for hard
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Size specifications may be hard or soft.
Hard sizes are always honored by the mesher, even if
SmartSizing is on. They take precedence over all other
size controls.
Soft sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing. P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
You can also specify a spacing ratio ratio of last
division to first. Used to bias the divisions towards one
end or towards the middle.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-44
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Area Sizing
C t l l t i i th i t i f
g y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Controls element size in the interior of areas:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool; then
select Size Controls, Areas, and [Set]
or AESIZE command
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ManualSize > Areas
Different areas can have different AESIZEs
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Different areas can have different AESIZEs.
Bounding lines will use the specified size only if they
have no LESIZE or KESIZE specified and if no
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
adjacent area has a smaller size.
Specified sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing to
accommodate line curvature or proximity to features
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-45
accommodate line curvature or proximity to features.
Training Manual
F. Mesh Order Control
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
By default, ANSYS will mesh areas or volumes in ascending entity
number.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The AORDER field on the MOPT command instructs ANSYS to mesh a
group of areas or volumes in order of ascending size.
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesher Opts or
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesher Opts , or
MOPT,AORDER,ON (default is OFF)
In cases where SmartSizing does not mesh as fine as needed,
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
g
the MOPT, AORDER,on command generates finer meshes in
critical areas for volume meshes
This option is not available when SmartSizing is on
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
This option is not available when SmartSizing is on.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-46
Training Manual
G. Generating the Mesh
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Generating the mesh is the final step in meshing.
First save the database
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
First save the database.
Then press [Mesh] in the MeshTool.
This brings up a picker. Press [Pick All] in the picker
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p p [ ] p
to indicate all entities.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-47
Training Manual
Generating the Mesh
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume ribgeom.db
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Mesh with SMRT,6. (Not a very good mesh)
Re-mesh with SMRT,3 (good mesh)
Set ESIZE to 0.2 and re-mesh. The mesh becomes coarse even though
SMRT is set to 3 because the smart-mesher takes ESIZE into account
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
SMRT is set to 3, because the smart mesher takes ESIZE into account.
Also, note that the element sizes are not uniform (because SMRT is
on).
Turn off SMRT and re-mesh. Element sizes are now more uniform (but
not ideal)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
not ideal).
Re-mesh with ESIZE set to 0.1.
G f S S
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Good meshes generated for this geometry with SMRT,3 or ESIZE,0.1.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-48
Training Manual
H. Changing a Mesh
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
If a mesh is not acceptable, you can always
re-mesh the model by following these steps:
g g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Clear the mesh.
The clear operation is the opposite of mesh: it
removes nodes and elements.
Use the [Clear] button on the MeshTool or use
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Use the [Clear] button on the MeshTool, or use
VCLEAR, ACLEAR, etc.
(If you are using the MeshTool, you may skip this
step since the program will prompt you whether to
clear or not hen o e ec te step 3 )
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
clear or not when you execute step 3.)
2. Specify new or different mesh controls.
3. Mesh again.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-49
Training Manual
Changing a Mesh
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Another meshing option is to refine the
mesh in specific regions.
Available for all area elements and only
g g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Available for all area elements and only
tetrahedral volume elements.
Easiest way is to use the MeshTool:
First save the database.
Th h h t t
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Then choose how you want to
specify the region of refinement at
nodes, elements, keypoints, lines, or
areas and press the Refine button.
Pick the entities at which you want
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Pick the entities at which you want
the mesh to be refined. (Not required
if you choose All Elems.)
Finally, choose the level of
refinement. Level 1 (minimal
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
(
refinement) is a good starting point.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-50
Training Manual
Changing a Mesh
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Continuing the last demo (ribgeom has been meshed with ESIZE =
0 2)
g g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
0.2)
Choose refinement at Lines and press Refine
Pick the top line, then choose the default minimal refinement
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-51
Training Manual
I. Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are two main meshing methods: free and
mapped.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Free Mesh
Has no element shape restrictions.
The mesh does not follow any pattern.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The mesh does not follow any pattern.
Suitable for complex shaped areas and volumes.
Mapped Mesh
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Restricts element shapes to quadrilaterals for areas
and hexahedra (bricks) for volumes.
Typically has a regular pattern with obvious rows of
elements.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Suitable only for regular areas and volumes such as
rectangles and bricks.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-52
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Free Mesh
+ Easy to create; no need to divide
Mapped Mesh
+ Generally contains a lower
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
+ Easy to create; no need to divide
complex shapes into regular
shapes.
Volume meshes can contain only
+ Generally contains a lower
number of elements.
+ Lower-order elements may be
acceptable so the number of
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Volume meshes can contain only
tetrahedra, resulting in a large
number of elements.
Only higher-order (10-node)
acceptable, so the number of
DOF is lower.
Areas and volumes must be
regular in shape and mesh
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Only higher-order (10-node)
tetrahedral elements are
acceptable, so the number of
DOF can be very high.
regular in shape, and mesh
divisions must meet certain
criteria.
Very difficult to achieve
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Very difficult to achieve,
especially for complex shaped
volumes.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-53
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Creating a Free Mesh
Free meshing is the default setting for both area
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Free meshing is the default setting for both area
and volume meshes.
Create a free mesh is easy:
Bring up the MeshTool and verify that free meshing is
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Bring up the MeshTool and verify that free meshing is
set.
SmartSizing is generally recommended for free
meshing, so activate it and specify a size level. Save
the database.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Then initiate the mesh by pressing the Mesh button.
Press [Pick All] in the picker to choose all entities
(recommended).
Or use the commands VMESH,ALL or AMESH,ALL.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Or use the commands VMESH,ALL or AMESH,ALL.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-54
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Creating a Mapped Mesh
Thi i t f hi b th d
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
This is not as easy as free meshing because the areas and
volumes have to meet certain requirements:
Area must contain either 3 or 4 lines (triangle or quadrilateral).
Volume must contain either 4, 5, or 6 areas (tetrahedron, triangular
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Volume must contain either 4, 5, or 6 areas (tetrahedron, triangular
prism, or hexahedron).
Element divisions on opposite sides must match.
For triangular areas or tetrahedral volumes, the number of element
di i i t b
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
divisions must be even.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-55
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
For quadrilateral areas or hexahedral volumes, unequal divisions
are allowed, as shown in these examples, but the number of
divisions must satisfy a formula (shown on the next page)
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
divisions must satisfy a formula (shown on the next page).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-56
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-57
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Thus mapped meshing involves a three-step procedure:
Ensure regular shapes, i.e, areas with 3 or 4 sides, or volumes with
4 5 6 id
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
4, 5, or 6 sides.
Specify size and shape controls
Generate the mesh
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-58
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Ensure regular shapes
I t th d l t i h th t th h
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
In most cases, the model geometry is such that the areas have
more than 4 sides, and volumes have more than 6 sides. To
convert these to regular shapes, you may need to do one or both
of these operations:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
Slice the areas (or volumes) into smaller, simpler shapes.
Concatenate two or more lines (or areas) to reduce the total number of
sides.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-59
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Slicing can be accomplished with the Boolean divide operation.
Remember that you can use the working plane, an area, or a line as
th li i t l
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the slicing tool.
Sometimes, it may be easier to create a new line or a new area than to
move and orient the working plane in the correct direction.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-60
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Concatenation creates a new line (for meshing purposes) that is a
combination of two or more lines, thereby reducing the number of
li ki th
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
lines making up the area.
Use the LCCAT command or Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing >
Concatenate > Lines, then pick the lines to be concatenated.
For area concatenation, use ACCAT command or Main Menu >
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
,
Preprocessor > Meshing > Concatenate > Areas
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Concatenating
these two lines
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
makes this a
4-sided area
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-61
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
You can also imply a concatenation by simply
identifying the three or four corners of the area. In this
case ANSYS internally generates the concatenation
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
case, ANSYS internally generates the concatenation.
To do this, choose Quad shape and Map mesh in the
MeshTool.
Then change 3/4 sided to Pick corners.
Press the Mesh button pick the area and then pick the 3 or
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Press the Mesh button, pick the area, and then pick the 3 or
4 corners that form the regular shape.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-62
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Notes on concatenation:
It is purely a meshing operation and therefore should be the last step before
meshing after all solid modeling operations This is because the output entity
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
meshing, after all solid modeling operations. This is because the output entity
obtained from a concatenation cannot be used in any subsequent solid modeling
operation.
You can "undo" a concatenation by deleting the line or area it produced.
Concatenating areas (for mapped volume meshing) is generally much more
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Co cate at g a eas ( o apped o u e es g) s ge e a y uc o e
complicated because you may also need to concatenate some lines. Lines are
automatically concatenated only when two adjacent, 4-sided areas are
concatenated.
Consider the add (Boolean) operation if the lines or areas meet at a tangent.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-63
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Specify size and shape controls
This is the second step of the three-step mapped
g
Meshing Areas:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
This is the second step of the three-step mapped
meshing procedure.
Choosing the shape is simple. In the MeshTool, choose
Quad for area meshing and Hex for volume meshing
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Quad for area meshing, and Hex for volume meshing,
then click on Map.
Commonly used size controls and the order in which
they are applied: Meshing Volumes:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
they are applied:
Line sizing [LESIZE] is always honored.
Global element size , if specified, will be applied to unsized
lines.
Default element sizing [DESIZE] will be applied to unsized
Meshing Volumes:
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Default element sizing [DESIZE] will be applied to unsized
lines only if ESIZE is not specified.
(SmartSizing is not valid.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-64
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
If you specify line divisions, remember that:
divisions on opposite sides must match, but you only need to specify
id Th h t ti ll t f di i i t th
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
one side. The map mesher automatically transfers divisions to the
opposite side.
if you have concatenated lines, divisions can only be applied to the
original (input) lines, not the composite line.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
6 divisions specified on
each original line
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
each original line.
12 divisions will be
automatically applied to
this line (opposite to
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
composite line).
How many divisions are
used for the other two
lines? (Upcoming demo
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-65
lines? (Upcoming demo
will answer it.)
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Generate the mapped mesh
O h d l h d i d th
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Once you have ensured regular shapes and assigned the
appropriate divisions, generating the mesh is easy. Just press the
Mesh button in the MeshTool, then press [Pick All] in the picker or
choose the desired entities.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-66
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Question: How would you
slice this model for
d hi ?
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
mapped meshing?
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Answer: It may not be worth the
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-67
effort!
Training Manual
Mapped Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume ribfull.db
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Bring up MeshTool and apply 6 divisions to top and right lines
Map-mesh the area using Pick corners. Notice that the left and
bottom lines get only two divisions each (from DESIZE).
Now specify ESIZE 4 (4 divisions per line) and re-mesh
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Now specify ESIZE,,4 (4 divisions per line) and re mesh
Finally, clear line divisions, specify ESIZE,0.1 (size), and re-mesh
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-68
Training Manual
J. Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
For volume meshing, we have only seen two
options so far:
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Free meshing, which creates an all-tet mesh. This
is easy to achieve but may not be desirable in
some cases because of the large number of
elements and total DOF created.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Mapped meshing, which creates an all-hex mesh.
This is desirable but usually very difficult to
achieve.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Hex-to-tet meshing provides a third option that
is the best of both worlds. It allows you to
have a combination of hex and tet meshes
without compromising the integrity of the mesh
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
without compromising the integrity of the mesh.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-69
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
This option works by creating pyramid-shaped elements in the transition
region between hex and tet regions.
Requires the hex mesh to be available (or at least a quad mesh at the shared
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Requires the hex mesh to be available (or at least a quad mesh at the shared
area).
The mesher first creates all tets, then combines and rearranges the tet elements
in the transition region to form pyramids.
Available only for element types that support both pyramid and tet shapes e g:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Available only for element types that support both pyramid and tet shapes, e.g:
Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89
Thermal SOLID90
Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Results are good even in the transition
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
SOLID95
g
region. Element faces are compatible even
when transitioning from a linear hex
element to a quadratic tet element.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-70
SOLID95
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Hex-to-tet meshing is valid for both quadratic-to-quadratic and linear-to-
quadratic transitions. Element type must support a 9-node pyramid for the latter.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Hex Mesh Transition Layer Tet Mesh
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Quadratic
to
Quadratic N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
10-Node Tet 13-Node Pyramid 20-Node Hex
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Linear
to
Quadratic
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-71
8-Node Hex 9-Node Pyramid 10-Node Tet
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Procedure involves four steps:
1 C t th h h
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Create the hex mesh.
Start by map-meshing the regular-shaped volumes. (Or mesh the
shared areas with quads.)
For stress analysis, use either an 8-node brick (SOLID45 or SOLID185)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y , ( )
or a 20-node brick (SOLID95 or SOLID186).
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-72
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
2. Activate an element type that supports both pyramids and tets.
These are usually brick elements that can degenerate into pyramids
d t t Ch k th El t M l il bl li t fi d t
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
and tets. Check the Elements Manual, available on-line, to find out
which element types are valid.
Examples:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Thermal SOLID90
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-73
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
3. Generate the tet mesh.
First activate free meshing.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Then mesh the volumes that are to be tet-meshed.
Pyramids are automatically generated at the interface.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-74
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
4. Convert degenerate tets to true 10-node tets.
The tet mesh created by the transition mesher consists of degenerate
l t 10 d t t h d d i d f 20 d b i k f
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
elements 10-node tetrahedra derived from 20-node bricks, for
example.
These elements are not as efficient as true 10-node tets such as
SOLID92, which use less memory and write smaller files during
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
solution.
To convert the degenerate tets into true tets:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Modify Mesh > Change Tets
O th TCHG d
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Or use the TCHG command.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-75
Training Manual
Hex-to-Tet Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume hextet.db
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Show element type list using Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete. There
are two element types: SOLID45 & 95
Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE,1 (size)
Map-mesh the regular shaped volume
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Map mesh the regular shaped volume
Set element type to 2, and activate tet-meshing
Free-mesh the other volume
Convert degenerate tets to SOLID92
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Show element type list. There are now three element types.
Select elements of type 2 (SOLID95 pyramids) and plot elements
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-76
Training Manual
K. Mesh Extrusion
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
When you extrude an area into a volume, you can extrude the area
elements along with it, resulting in a meshed volume. This is called mesh
extrusion.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Advantage: Easy to create a volume mesh with all bricks (hexahedra) or a
combination of bricks and prisms.
O S f f
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Obvious requirement: Shape of the volume must lend itself to extrusion.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP Extrude P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-77
Training Manual
Mesh Extrusion
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Procedure
1 D fi t l t t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Define two element types an area
element and a volume element.
Area element: Choose MESH200
quadrilaterals. MESH200 is a mesh-
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
q
only (Not Solved) element and has
no DOFs or material properties
associated with it.
Volume element: Should be
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Volume element: Should be
compatible with the MESH200
element type. For example, if you
choose midside nodes for MESH200,
the 3-D solid element should also
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
the 3 D solid element should also
have midside nodes.
ET command or
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element
T Add/Edit/D l t
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-78
Type > Add/Edit/Delete
Training Manual
Mesh Extrusion
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
2. Mesh the area to be extruded with MESH200 elements.
Use mapped or free meshing with desired mesh density.
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool
3. Choose element extrusion options.
EXTOPT command or Main Menu >
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
EXTOPT command or Main Menu >
Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude
> Elem Ext Opts
Typical options are:
Active TYPE attribute (should be 3-D
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Active TYPE attribute (should be 3-D
solid).
Number of element divisions in the
extrusion direction (i.e, number of
elements through the thickness). Must
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
g )
be greater than zero; otherwise, only
the area will be extruded, without
elements.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-79
Training Manual
Mesh Extrusion
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
4. Extrude the area.
First delete concatenated lines, if any. If concatenations are present,
ANSYS ill t ll th t i ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS will not allow the extrusion operation.
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Concatenate > Del Concats > Lines
Then extrude the area using any of the extrusion methods.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-80
Training Manual
Mesh Extrusion
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume ribgeom.db
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Bring up the Element Types dialog, delete PLANE82 element type, and
replace it with MESH200 4-node quad
Also add SOLID45 as element type 2
Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE 0 1
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE,0.1
Choose free quad-meshing and mesh the area
Set extrusion options: TYPE=2, number of element divisions = 4
Rotate view to ISO
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Extrude area along normal with offset = 0.4
Save the database to ribvol.db
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-81
Training Manual
L. Sweep Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Sweep meshing is yet another option available for volume
meshing. It is the process of meshing an existing volume by
i h
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
sweeping an area mesh.
Similar to mesh extrusion, except that the volume already exists in
this case (from a geometry import, for example).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
( g y p , p )
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-82
Training Manual
Sweep Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Advantages:
Easy to create a volume mesh with all
b i k (h h d ) bi ti
Target surface
(1 area)
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
bricks (hexahedra) or a combination
of bricks and prisms.
Option to tet-mesh volumes that are
not sweepable. Transition
S f
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
pyramids are automatically
generated.
Requirements:
Source surface
(1 area)
Valid for sweep meshing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
q
Topology of the volume must be
consistent in the sweep direction.
Example: a block with a through hole
(ok even if the hole is tapered)
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
(ok even if the hole is tapered).
Source and target surfaces must be
single areas. Concatenated areas are
not allowed for either the source or
the target
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-83
the target.
Not valid for sweep meshing
Training Manual
Sweep Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Procedure
Define and activate a 3-D hexahedral solid element
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Define and activate a 3-D hexahedral solid element
type, such as structural SOLID45 or SOLID95.
Bring up MeshTool and choose Hex/Wedge and Sweep.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Choose how the source and target surfaces are
identified:
Auto Source/Target means that ANSYS will automatically
choose them based on the volumes topology
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
choose them based on the volume s topology.
Pick Source/Target means that you will be choosing
them.
Press the SWEEP button and follow prompt
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Press the SWEEP button and follow prompt
instructions from the picker. (Or use VSWEEP
command.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-84
Training Manual
Sweep Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Tet-Mesh Option
A f l ti i t t t t
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A useful sweep option is to generate a tet-
mesh in non-sweepable volumes.
To use this option:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
Make sure that the element type supports
degenerate pyramid and tetrahedron
shapes. Examples:
Structural SOLID95 186 VISCO89
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Thermal SOLID90
Choose Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
> Mesh > Volume Sweep > Sweep Opts and
activate the tet-mesh option. (Or use the
EXTOPT,VSWE command.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-85
Training Manual
Sweep Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Notes
T h l l d t li it l
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To map-mesh a complex volume, you may need to slice it several
times and also do some area and line concatenations. For sweep
meshing, you typically need only a few slicing operations, and no
concatenations are needed!
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
You can control the source area mesh using standard mesh
controls. SmartSizing is generally not recommended since it is
meant for free meshing
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
meant for free meshing.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-86
Training Manual
Sweep Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume ribvol.db
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Clear all volumes and all areas, then plot volumes
Bring up MeshTool and activate sweep meshing
Sweep mesh the volume
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-87
Training Manual
M. F.E. Imports
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In addition to solid model geometry, ANSYS can also import finite
element model data (nodes and elements) from certain packages. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The most common approach is for the software vendor to write
out the nodes and elements in a format that ANSYS can read
(using NREAD and EREAD). This format is published in the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
( g ) p
ANSYS Programmers Manual.
Some software packages provide an interface that allows you to
transfer more than just nodes and elements from another finite
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
transfer more than just nodes and elements from another finite
element package into ANSYS.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-88
Training Manual
N. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
This workshop consists of five exercises:
W7B. Pillow Block
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W7C. Connecting Rod
W7D. Cotter Pin
W7E. Impeller
W7F Wheel
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
W7F. Wheel
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
7-89
Chapter 8
Defining the Material
Training Manual
Chapter 8 Defining the Material
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In this chapter, we discuss units, importing ANSYS defined
materials, as well as describe how to define a user defined
t i l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
material.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-2
Training Manual
A. UNITS
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A Note on Units
Y d t d t t ll ANSYS th t f it i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You do not need to tell ANSYS the system of units you are using.
Simply decide what units you will use, then make sure all of your
input is consistent.
For example, if the model geometry is in inches, make sure that all
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
For example, if the model geometry is in inches, make sure that all
other input data material properties, real constants, loads, etc.
are in terms of inches.
ANSYS does NOT do units conversion! It simply accepts all
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS does NOT do units conversion! It simply accepts all
numbers you input without questioning their validity.
The command /UNITS allows you to specify a units system, but it
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
is simply a recording device to let other users of your model know
what units you used.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-3
Training Manual
B. ANSYS Defined Materials
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Using the Material Library
This method allows you to choose a predefined set of properties for a
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
This method allows you to choose a predefined set of properties for a
given material.
ANSYS supplies typical structural and thermal properties (linear only) for
some common materials but we strongly recommend that you create your
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
some common materials, but we strongly recommend that you create your
own material library.
To choose a material from the library:
First define the library path.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
y p
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Library > Library Path
Enter the location from which to READ material data, e.g, \v100\ANSYS\matlib.
Or use the /MPLIB command.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-4
Training Manual
ANSYS Defined Material
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Then import a material from the library.
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material
Library > Import Library
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Choose the units system. This is
used only to filter the list of files
shown in the subsequent dialog.
ANSYS has no knowledge of units
and does NOT do unit conversion
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
and does NOT do unit conversion.
Choose the desired material file,
such as steel AISI C1020.
Or use the MPREAD command with the
LIB option
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
LIB option.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-5
Training Manual
C. Material Model GUI
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Specifying Individual Material Properties
Instead of choosing a material name this method involves directly
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Instead of choosing a material name, this method involves directly
specifying the required properties through the Material Model GUI.
To specify individual properties:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Models
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Models
Double-click on the appropriate property to be defined.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-6
Training Manual
Material Model GUI
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Work through the tree
structure to the material
t t b d fi d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
type to be defined.
Then enter the individual
property values.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p p y
Or use the MP command.
mp,ex,1,30e6
mp prxy 1 3
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
mp,prxy,1,.3
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-7
Training Manual
Material Model GUI
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Add temperature dependent
properties
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Graph properties vs. temperature
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-8
Training Manual
Material Model GUI
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Copy material models from one
table to another
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Delete material models
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-9
Training Manual
Material Model GUI
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Material GUI Favorites Option
Stores shortcuts to groups of
f tl d t i l ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
frequently used material properties.
Allows you to define a template
based on the currently selected
model in the database, then specify
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
, p y
your own name for the template
(which can be a useful descriptor
such as "Steel" or "Metal Plasticity").
D t ifi d t i l
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Does not save specified materials
and related data. It does, however,
save your Favorites template to the
ANSYS registry file for use in all
b t l
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
subsequent analyses.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-10
Training Manual
D. Listing Defined Materials
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
The Material Model GUI shows one material at a time. Multiple
material properties can be listed by: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Utility Menu > List > Properties > All Materials
Or, use the MPLIST command
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Note, Nonlinear material properties can be listed using Utility Menu >
List Properties > Data Tables or via the TBLIST command.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-11
Training Manual
E. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
This workshop consists of two exercises:
W8A. User Input Material
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W8B. Material Library Input
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
8-12
Chapter 9
Loading
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The solution step is where we apply loads on the object and let
the solver calculate the finite element solution. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Loads are available both in the Preprocessor and Solution menus.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-2
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
A. Define Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are five categories of loads:
DOF Constraints Specified DOF values, such as displacements
i t l i t t i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
in a stress analysis or temperatures in a
thermal analysis.
Concentrated Loads Point loads, such as forces or heat flow rates.
Surface Loads Loads distributed over a surface, such as
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
,
pressures or convections.
Body Loads Volumetric or field loads, such as temperatures
(causing thermal expansion) or internal heat
generation.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
generation.
Inertia Loads Loads due to structural mass or inertia, such
as gravity and rotational velocity.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-3
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
Define Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
You can apply loads either on the solid model or directly on the
FEA model (nodes and elements). O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Solid model loads are easier to apply because there are fewer entities
to pick.
Moreover, solid model loads are independent of the mesh. You dont
need to reapply the loads if you change the mesh.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
pp y y g
Pressures on element faces
Pressure on line
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP Constraints
t d
Constraint
li
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
at nodes
FEA model
on line
Solid model
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-4
Force at node Force at keypoint
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
Define Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Regardless of how you apply the loads, the solver expects all
loads to be in terms of the finite element model. Therefore, solid
d l l d t ti ll t f d t th d l i d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
model loads are automatically transferred to the underlying nodes
and elements during solution.
Solid Model Loads can be transferred to the finite element mesh
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
manually before solving by using the SBCTRAN command. This
can be useful to see all of the loads, both solid model and FE, that
have been applied.
F l if i li d t l t f th l t
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
For example, if a pressure is applied to an area, a plot of the elements
will not show the pressure until the SBCTRAN command is issued or
the model is solved.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-5
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
B. Nodal Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
All forces, displacements, and other direction-dependent nodal
quantities are interpreted in the nodal coordinate system. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Input quantities:
Forces and moments FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ
Displacement constraints UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
C li d t i t ti
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Coupling and constraint equations
Etc.
Output quantities:
Calculated displacements UX UY UZ ROTX ROTY ROTZ
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Calculated displacements UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Reaction forces FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ
Etc.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-6
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
...Nodal Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A nodal coordinate system is attached to every node in the model.
B d f lt th d l CS i ll l t Gl b l C t i i ll
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
By default, the nodal CS is parallel to Global Cartesian, i.e, all
applied forces and displacement constraints are interpreted in
Global Cartesian by default.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Y
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Y
n
X
n
Y
n
X
n
Y
n
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
X
Y
X
Y
n
X
n
n
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-7
X
X
n
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
If necessary, you can rotate
the nodal CS to a different
i t ti
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
orientation.
For example:
To simulate an inclined roller
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
To simulate an inclined roller
support.
To apply radial forces.
To apply radial constraints
(perhaps to simulate a rigid
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
(perhaps to simulate a rigid,
press-fitted pin).
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-8
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
To rotate nodes, use this four-step procedure:
1. Select the desired nodes.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
2. Activate the coordinate system (or create a local CS)
into which you want to rotate the nodes, e.g,
CSYS,1.
3. Choose Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling >
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
3. Choose Main Menu Preprocessor Modeling
Move/Modify > Rotate Node CS > To Active CS, then
press [Pick All] in the picker.
Or issue NROTAT,ALL.
4 Reactivate all nodes
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Note: When you apply symmetry on anti-symmetry boundary
conditions, ANSYS automatically rotates all nodes on that boundary.
4. Reactivate all nodes.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Very Important: Nodal Coordinate Systems ALWAYS behave in a
Cartesian manner. NROTAT simply aligns the nodal CS with a global
or local CS. Consequently, remember that (a) there is no dependency
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-9
or association of a nodal CS with a global/local CS to which it is
rotated and (b) the nodal CS still acts as a Cartesian CS.
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume rib.db.
Off t ki l t t f b tt i l ( i k i t l ti )
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Offset working plane to center of bottom circle (using average keypoint location).
Create local cylindrical CS at working plane origin.
Select nodes at radius = 0.35 and plot them.
Rotate all selected nodes into active system.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Apply a UX displacement constraint (or an FX force) at all selected nodes. Note
the radial direction.
Now activate global Cartesian (CSYS,0).
Rotate all selected nodes into active system.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Replot, and note the new direction of the loads.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-10
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
C. Displacement Constraints
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Displacement constraints are also used to enforce symmetry or
antisymmetry boundary conditions. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Symmetry BC: Out-of-plane displacements and in-plane rotations are
fixed.
Antisymmetry BC: In-plane displacements and out-of-plane rotations
are fixed.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Y
X
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Antisymmetry Boundary
UY=UZ=0
Symmetry Boundary
UX=0
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-11
UY=UZ=0
ROTX=0
UX=0
ROTY=ROTZ=0
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
D. Concentrated Forces
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A force is a concentrated load (or
point load) that you can apply at
d k i t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
a node or keypoint.
Point loads such as forces are
appropriate for line element
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
pp p
models such as beams, spars, and
springs.
In solid and shell models point
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
In solid and shell models, point
loads usually cause a stress
singularity, but are acceptable if
you ignore stresses in the vicinity.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Remember, you can use select
logic to ignore the elements in
the vicinity of the point load.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-12
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
...Concentrated Forces
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In the 2-D quarter symmetry solid model shown at bottom left, notice that
maximum stress SMAX (23,590) is reported at the location of the force.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
When the nodes and elements in the vicinity of the force are unselected,
SMAX (12,281) moves to the bottom left corner, which is another
singularity due to the reentry corner.
Reflected about x-z plane
half symmetry model
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
half symmetry model
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP reentry corner P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-13
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
Concentrated Forces
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
By unselecting nodes and elements near the bottom left corner,
you get the expected stress distribution with SMAX (7,945) near
th t h l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the top hole.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-14
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
Concentrated Forces
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Note that for axisymmetric models:
Input values of forces are based on the full 360
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Input values of forces are based on the full 360 .
Output values (reaction forces) are also based on the full 360.
For example suppose a cylindrical shell of radius r has an edge load of P
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
For example, suppose a cylindrical shell of radius r has an edge load of P
lb/in. To apply this load on a 2-D axisymmetric shell model (SHELL51
elements, for example), you would specify a force of 2rP.
P lb/in 2rP lb
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
r
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-15
Training Manual
Chapter 9 - Loading
E. Verifying Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Verifying applied loads
Pl t th b ti ti l d b l
y g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Plot them by activating load symbols:
Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Symbols
Commands -- /PBC, /PSF, /PBF
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Or list them:
Utility Menu > List > Loads >
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
9-16
Chapter 10
Solution
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
A. Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The function of the solver is to solve the system of linear
simultaneous equations representing the structures degrees of
f d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
freedom.
The solution could take anywhere from a few seconds to several
hours depending primarily on the size of the model, the solver
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p g p y ,
selected, and the speed of your computer.
A linear static analysis with one load step requires only one such
solution but a nonlinear or transient analysis may require tens
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
solution, but a nonlinear or transient analysis may require tens,
hundreds, or even thousands of solutions.
Therefore, the type of solver you choose for solution can be quite
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
important.
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-2
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The solvers available in ANSYS can be categorized into four types:
1) Direct elimination
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1) Direct elimination
2) Iterative
3) Distributed ANSYS
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
1) Direct elimination solvers
Sparse (default)
Frontal
2) Iterative solvers
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
2) Iterative solvers
PCG (Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient)
ICCG (Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient)
JCG (Jacobi Conjugate Gradient)
AMG (Al b i M lti id)
( l M t i S l ti Di t ib t d Sh d M )
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
AMG (Algebraic Multigrid)

- (only Matrix Solution Distributed on Shared Memory)
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-3
Part of the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on license

Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
3) Distributed ANSYS (D-ANSYS) (all of the ANSYS /SOLUTION phase is in
parallel which includes stiffness matrix generation, linear equation
solving and results calculation)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Distributed Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient
(EQSLVE, DPCG)
Distributed Jacobi Conjugate Gradient
(EQSLVE, DJCG)
Distributed Sparse Solver

(EQSLVE, DSPARSE)
Factorization of the matrix and back/forward substitution is done in distributed
parallel mode
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Existing Shared Memory Sparse Solver (EQSLVE,SPARSE)
The solver itself runs only on the master process (other parts run in distributed
parallel)
May be run in shared memory parallel mode on the master machine
(/CONFIG,NPROC,N)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
( , , )
A general discussion of direct and iterative solvers will be covered in the
next slides.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-4
Part of the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on license

Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Calculate the solution as follows:
1 Formulate individual element matrices
Formulate element
t i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Formulate individual element matrices.
2. Assemble the global stiffness matrix.
3a. (Sparse direct solver) Factorize the stiffness
matrix, then calculate DOF solution from
back-substitution
matrices
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
back-substitution.
3b. (Iterative Solver) Start with an assumed zero
value for all DOF and iterate to convergence
(based on an input tolerance on residual
force).
Assemble
global matrix
.full
file
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
4. Use element matrices to calculate the
element solution.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Solve matrix
equation
.rst /.rth
file
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-5
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Direct solver vs. Iterative solver (simplified discussion)
If given the linear static case of [K]{x} = {F}, Direct solvers factorize [K] to solve for
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
g [ ]{ } { } [ ]
[K]
-1
. Then, {x} = [K]
-1
{F}.
This factorization is computationally expensive but is done once.
Iterative solvers use a preconditioner [Q] to solve the equation [Q][K]{x} = [Q]{F}.
A th t [Q] [K]
1
I thi t i i l [I]{ } [K]
1
{F} H th
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Assume that [Q] = [K]
-1
. In this trivial case, [I]{x} = [K]
-1
{F}. However, the
preconditioner is not usually [K]
-1
. The closer [Q] is to [K]
-1
, the better the
preconditioning is. However, the preconditioner is not usually [K]
-1
, so this process
is repeated - hence the name, iterative solver.
For iterative solvers, matrix multiplication (not factorization) is performed. This is
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
For iterative solvers, matrix multiplication (not factorization) is performed. This is
much faster than matrix inversion if done entirely in RAM, so, as long as the
number of iterations is not very high (which happens for well-conditioned
matrices), iterative solvers can be more efficient than sparse solvers.
The main difference between the iterative solvers in ANSYS PCG, JCG, ICCG
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
is the type of pre-conditioner used.
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-6
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
OO
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-7
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Parallel Performance solvers (special license required)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Iterative solver that can be used in single and multiprocessor environments
DDS (Distributed Domain Solver)
Decomposes large models into smaller domains, and then sends those domains
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p g ,
to multiple processors for solving. The DDS solver is scalable, intended for large
static or full transient analyses, with symmetric matrices that do not involve
inertia relief or problems using the probabilistic design system (PDS).
DPCG (Distributed Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient Solver)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
DPCG (Distributed Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient Solver)
Based on the PCG solver. Preserves all of the merits of the PCG solver and can
be run on either shared memory or distributed memory machines with superior
scalability to the PCG solver.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
DJCG (Distributed Jacobi Conjugate Gradient Solver)
Iterative equation solver based on the JCG solver. Scalability of this solver is
superior to the JCG solver with little extra memory required. DJCG solver is
available only for static and full transient analyses where the stiffness is
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-8
symmetric.
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Solvers
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To choose a solver:
Main Menu > Solution > Analysis Type > Soln Controls, then choose Soln
O ti t b
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Options tab
Or use EQSLV command
The default is to use a program chosen solver [eqslv,-1], which
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p g [ q , ],
is usually the sparse direct solver.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-9
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Loading & Solution
B. Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
What is a loadstep and a substep?
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Force
Loadstep 1 Loadstep 2 Loadstep 3 Loadstep 4 Loadstep 5
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
20
25
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
10
15
o
r
c
e

(
l
b
s
)
A loadstep can be defined as
one set of loading conditions
for which you obtain a
solution
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
5
10
F
o
Substep 1 of Loadstep 2
solution.
A substep can be defined as a
subdivision of a loadstep.
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time (seconds)
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
C. Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The procedure to solve for one set of loading conditions (i.e, one
load step) is as follows: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Import or create the model
Mesh it
Apply loads
Solve (one load step)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Solve (one load step)
Review results
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-11
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
If you have multiple loading conditions, you
can choose one of two ways: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Solve for all loads together in a single load
step
Or apply each loading condition separately
and solve multiple load steps.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p p
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-12
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
By using multiple load steps, you can:
isolate the structures response to each loading condition.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
combine these responses in any desired fashion during
postprocessing, allowing you to study different what-if scenarios.
(This is called load case combination and is valid for linear analyses
only. Load case combinations are covered in a later chapter.)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
There are two ways to define and solve multiple load steps:
Multiple solve method
Load step file method
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Load step file method
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-13
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Multiple Solve Method
An extension of the single-load-step
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
An extension of the single-load-step
solution, where you solve each load
step sequentially without leaving the
Solution processor.
Mesh it
Apply loads
Solve (load step 1)
A l diff t l d
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Best suited for batch mode.
When used in interactive mode, this
method is useful only for models that
Apply different loads
Solve (load step 2)
Solve (load step 3)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
method is useful only for models that
solve quickly.
Etc.
Review results
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-14
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Load Step File Method
In this case instead of solving each load
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
In this case, instead of solving each load
step, you write the load step information to
a file, called the load step file:
Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts > Write
LS File
Mesh it
Apply loads
Write to LS file (.s01)
A l diff t l d
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
LS File
Or use LSWRITE command.
The load step file is named jobname.s01,
s02 s03 etc
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
.s02, .s03, etc.
After all load steps have been written out,
you can use one command LSSOLVE or
Main Menu > Solution > Solve > From LS Files
Etc.
Solve from LS files
Review results
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Main Menu > Solution > Solve > From LS Files
to read in each file sequentially and
solve it.
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-15
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The advantage of the load step file method is that you can
interactively set up all load steps even for a large model and then
l th hil f th t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
solve them while you are away from the computer.
Note: The loading commands on the load step file are always in
terms of nodes and elements, even if you apply loads on the solid
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
, y pp y
model.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-16
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
For both methods:
It is recommended that the user specify a new title prior
t SOLVE (M lti l S l M th d) d LSWRITE (L d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
to SOLVE (Multiple Solve Method) and LSWRITE (Load
Step File Method) since /TITLE is saved in the results
file for each load step.
Loads applied in a previous load step will stay in the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
database unless they are deleted. So be sure to delete
any loads that are not part of the current load step.
Results for each load step are appended to the results
file and identified as load step 1, load step 2, etc.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
p , p ,
In postprocessing, you first read in the desired set of
results and then review them.
The database contains the loads and results for the last
load step that was solved
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
load step that was solved.
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-17
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
Multiple Loadsteps
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume rib.db
Fi l ft li i UX d b tt li i UY
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Fix left line in UX and bottom line in UY
Apply pressure = 100 on top line
Write LS file 1, then list it and show F.E. load commands
Apply pressure = 50 to 100 (tapered) on right line
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Delete the top pressure load
Write LS file 2
LSSOLVE,1,2
Review results for each load step separately N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-18
Training Manual
Chapter 10 Solution
D. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
This workshop consists of three exercises:
W10A. 3-D Bracket
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W10B. Connecting Rod
W10C. Wheel
Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
December 17, 2004
Inventory #002170
10-19
Chapter 11
Structural Analysis
Training Manual
Chapter 11 Structural Analysis
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In this chapter, we will describe the specifics of a structural
analysis. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The purpose is two-fold:
To reiterate the general analysis procedure.
To introduce you to structural loads and boundary conditions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
To introduce you to structural loads and boundary conditions
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-2
Training Manual
Chapter 11 A. Preprocessing
Geometry
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Geometry
C ith b t d ithi ANSYS i t d
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Can either be created within ANSYS or imported.
Include details to improve results:
Goal is to sufficiently model the stiffness of the structure
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Goal is to sufficiently model the stiffness of the structure
Add details to avoid stress singularities (e.g. fillets)
Exclude details not in region of interest (e.g. exclude small holes)
Add details to improve boundary conditions (e.g. apply pressure to an
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
area rather than using concentrated load)
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-3
Training Manual
Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element type
The table below shows commonly used structural element types.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
y yp
The nodal DOFs may include: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ.
Commonly used structural element types
2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Linear PLANE42 SOLID45 SHELL63 BEAM3
PLANE182 SOLID185 SHELL181 BEAM4
BEAM188
Quadratic PLANE2 SOLID95 SHELL93 BEAM189
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Material properties
Minimum requirement is Youngs Modulus EX If Poissons Ratio is
PLANE82 SOLID92
PLANE183 SOLID186
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Minimum requirement is Young s Modulus, EX. If Poisson s Ratio is
not entered a default of 0.3 will be assumed.
Setting preferences to Structural limits the Material Model GUI to
display only structural properties.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-4
Real constants and Section properties
Primarily needed for shell and line elements.
Training Manual
Chapter 11 B. Solution
Define Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Structural loading conditions can be:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
DOF Constraints Regions of the model where displacements are known.
Concentrated Forces External forces that can be simplified as a point load.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Pressures Surfaces where forces on an area are known.
Uniform Temperature Temperatures applied as a body force used with a reference
t t t di t th l t i
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
temperature to predict thermal strains.
Gravity Accelerations applied as inertia boundary conditions
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-5
Training Manual
Displacement Constraints
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Displacement Constraints
Used to specify where the model is fixed (zero displacement locations)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Used to specify where the model is fixed (zero displacement locations).
Can also be non-zero, to simulate a known deflection.
T l di l t t i t
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
To apply displacement constraints :
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply
> Structural > Displacement
Choose where you want to apply the
constraint
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
constraint.
Pick the desired entities in the
graphics window.
Then choose the constraint direction.
Value defaults to zero.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Or use the D family of commands: DK, DL,
DA, D.
Question: In which coordinate system
are UX UY and UZ interpreted?
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-6
are UX, UY, and UZ interpreted?
Training Manual
Concentrated Forces
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To apply a force, the following information is needed:
node or keypoint number (which you can identify by picking)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
force magnitude (which should be consistent with the system of units
you are using)
direction of the force FX, FY, or FZ
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Use:
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Force/Moment
Or the commands FK or F
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Question: In which coordinate system are FX, FY, and FZ
interpreted?
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-7
Training Manual
Pressure
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Pressures
T l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To apply a pressure:
Structural > Pressure
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
pressure -- usually on lines for 2-D
models, on areas for 3-D models.
Pick the desired entities in the graphics
window
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
window.
Then enter the pressure value.
A positive value indicates a
compressive pressure (acting towards
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
the centroid of the element).
Or use the SF family of commands: SFL,
SFA, SFE, SF.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-8
Training Manual
Pressure
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
For a 2-D model, where pressures
are usually applied on a line, you
if t d
500
L3
500
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
can specify a tapered pressure
by entering a value for both the I
and J ends of the line.
VALI = 500
L3
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
I and J are determined by the line
direction. If you see the taper
going in the wrong direction,
simply reapply the pressure with
VALI = 500
L3
1000
500
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
simply reapply the pressure with
the values reversed.
VALI = 500
VALJ = 1000
1000
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
VALI = 1000
VALJ = 500
L3
500
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-9
Training Manual
Uniform temperature
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Uniform Temperature
T d fi if t t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To define uniform temperature
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply >
Structural > Temperature > Uniform Temp
Or use the TUNIF command
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Or use the TUNIF command.
) (
ref th
T T = Recall,
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
To define reference temperature
Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts > Other > Reference Temp
Or use the TREF command or as MPREFT
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Or use the TREF command or as MP,REFT
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-10
Training Manual
Gravity
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Gravity
T l it ti l l ti
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To apply gravitational acceleration:
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads >
Apply > Structural > Inertia > Gravity
Or use the ACEL command.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Notes:
A positive acceleration value causes deflection in the negative
direction. If Y is pointing upwards, for example, a positive ACELY
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
value will cause the structure to move downwards.
Density (or mass in some form) must be defined for gravity and other
inertia loads.
Acceleration can also be applied on an element component with the
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Acceleration can also be applied on an element component with the
CMACEL command.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-11
Training Manual
Modifying and Deleting Loads
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
T dif l d l i l l th l d
y g g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To modify a load value, simply reapply the load
with the new value.
To delete loads:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Delete
When you delete solid model loads, ANSYS also
automatically deletes all corresponding finite
element loads
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
element loads.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-12
Training Manual
Solutions Options
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Static vs. Dynamic Analysis
A t ti l i th t l th tiff f
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A static analysis assumes that only the stiffness forces are
significant.
A dynamic analysis takes into account all three types of forces.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y y yp
For example, consider the analysis of a diving board.
If the diver is standing still, it might be sufficient to do
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
g , g
a static analysis.
But if the diver is jumping up and down, you will need
to do a dynamic analysis.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-13
Training Manual
Solutions Options
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Inertia and damping forces are usually significant if the applied
loads vary rapidly with time. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Therefore you can use time-dependency of loads as a way to
choose between static and dynamic analysis.
If the loading is constant over a relatively long period of time, choose
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
If the loading is constant over a relatively long period of time, choose
a static analysis.
Otherwise, choose a dynamic analysis.
In general if the excitation frequency is less than 1/3 of the
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
In general, if the excitation frequency is less than 1/3 of the
structures lowest natural frequency, a static analysis may be
acceptable.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-14
Training Manual
Solutions Options
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Linear vs. Nonlinear Analysis
A li l i th t th l di li ibl
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A linear analysis assumes that the loading causes negligible
changes to the stiffness of the structure. Typical characteristics
are:
Small deflections
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Small deflections
Strains and stresses within the elastic limit
No abrupt changes in stiffness such as two bodies coming into and
out of contact
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Stress
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Elastic modulus
(EX)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-15
Strain
Training Manual
Solutions Options
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A nonlinear analysis is needed if the loading causes significant
changes in the structures stiffness. Typical reasons for stiffness
t h i ifi tl
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
to change significantly are:
Strains beyond the elastic limit (plasticity)
Large deflections, such as with a loaded fishing rod
Contact between two bodies
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Contact between two bodies
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Stress
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Strain
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-16
Training Manual
Chapter 11 C. Postprocessing
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Reviewing results of a stress analysis generally involves:
Deformed shape
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Stresses
Reaction forces
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Deformed Shape
Gives a quick indication of whether the loads were applied in the
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
correct direction.
Legend column shows the maximum displacement, DMX.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
You can also animate the deformation.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-17
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To plot the deformed shape:
General Postproc > Plot
R lt D f d Sh
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Results > Deformed Shape
Or use the PLDISP command.
For animation:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Utility Menu > PlotCtrls >
Animate > Deformed Shape
Or use the ANDISP
command
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
command.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-18
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Stresses
Th f ll i t t i ll il bl f 3 D lid
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The following stresses are typically available for a 3-D solid
model:
Component stresses SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ (global Cartesian
directions by default)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y )
Principal stresses S1, S2, S3, SEQV (von Mises), SINT (stress
intensity)
Best viewed as contour plots which allow you to quickly locate
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Best viewed as contour plots, which allow you to quickly locate
hot spots or trouble regions.
Nodal solution: Stresses are averaged at the nodes, showing smooth,
continuous contours.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Element solution: No averaging, resulting in discontinuous contours.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-19
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To plot stress contours:
General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu or PLNSOL command
General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu or PLESOL command
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You can also animate stress contours:
Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Animate > Deformed Results... or ANCNTR command
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-20
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A Note on PowerGraphics
It is the default graphics setting (/GRAPH POWER)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
It is the default graphics setting (/GRAPH,POWER).
Plots only the visible surfaces and ignores everything
underneath.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Advantages:
Faster REPLOT, crisp graphics.
Smooth, almost photo-realistic displays.
Prevents stress averaging across material and real
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Prevents stress averaging across material and real
constant boundaries.
To deactivate PowerGraphics (or activate full
graphics):
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
graphics ):
Toolbar > POWRGRPH
Or issue /GRAPH,FULL
Or interactively, Utility Menu>PlotCtrls>Style>
HiddenLineOptions> Graphics Display Method is Full Model
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-21
HiddenLineOptions> Graphics Display Method is...Full Model
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Reaction Forces
Th f th ti f i h di ti t l th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The sum of the reaction forces in each direction must equal the
sum of applied loads in that direction.
Best viewed as a listing:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
General Postprocessor > List Results > Reaction Solution or PRRSOL
command
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
This example had an applied pressure
of 1000 psi in the Y direction over a
10 x 10 area, which results in reaction
forces at nodes where constraints were
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
forces at nodes where constraints were
applied. Notice that the total value of
force in the X and Z directions are zero,
and the Y direction is 1000*(10x10) = 0.1e6.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-22
Training Manual
Verify Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
the solution is acceptable. What you need to check depends on
the type of problem you are solving but here are some typical
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the type of problem you are solving, but here are some typical
questions to ask:
Do FEA results agree with hand calculations or experimental
data?
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
data?
Is the displacement solution correct? Check the FEA
displacement solution first since FEA stresses are second order
lt
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
results.
Do the reaction forces balance the applied loads?
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Where is the maximum stress located?
Are the stress values beyond the elastic limit?
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-23
y
If so, the load magnitudes may be wrong, or you may need to do a
nonlinear analysis.
Training Manual
Verify Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Is the mesh adequate?
This is always debatable, but you can gain confidence in the mesh by
i ti ti
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
using error estimation.
Other ways to check mesh adequacy:
Plot the element solution (unaveraged stresses) and look for
elements with high stress gradients. These regions are candidates
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
elements with high stress gradients. These regions are candidates
for mesh refinement.
If there is a significant difference between the nodal (averaged)
and element (unaveraged) stress contours, the mesh may be too
coarse
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
coarse.
Similarly, if there is a significant difference between
PowerGraphics and full graphics stresses, the mesh may be too
coarse.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Re-mesh with twice as many elements, re-solve, and compare the
results. (But this may not always be practical.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-24
Training Manual
Chapter 11 D. Workshops
Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
This workshop consists of two problems:
11A. Lathe Cutter
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
11B. 2-D Corner Bracket Tutorial
Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
11-25
Chapter 12
Thermal Analysis
Training Manual
Chapter 12 Thermal Analysis
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In this chapter, we will describe the specifics of a thermal analysis.
Th i t f ld
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The purpose is two-fold:
To reiterate the general analysis procedure.
To introduce you to thermal loads and boundary conditions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-2
Training Manual
Geometry
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Geometry
C ith b t d ithi ANSYS i t d
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Can either be created within ANSYS or imported.
Include details to improve results:
Goal is to sufficiently model the thermal mass of the structure.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Goal is to sufficiently model the thermal mass of the structure.
Convection loads requires areas be correctly modeled.
Heat generation loads requires the volumes be correctly modeled.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-3
Training Manual
Meshing
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element type
The table below shows commonly used thermal element types.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The nodal DOF is: TEMP.
Commonly used thermal element types
2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements 2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Linear PLANE55 SOLID70 SHELL57 LINK31, 32, 33, 34
SHELL131
Quadratic PLANE77 SOLID90 SHELL132
PLANE35 SOLID87
Linear PLANE55 SOLID70 SHELL57 LINK31, 32, 33, 34
SHELL131
Quadratic PLANE77 SOLID90 SHELL132
PLANE35 SOLID87 N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Material properties
Minimum requirement is Kx, thermal conductivity for steady state
analysis
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
analysis.
Setting preferences to thermal limits the Material Model GUI to
display only Thermal properties.
R l t t / S ti ti
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-4
Real constants / Section properties
Primarily needed for shell and line elements.
Training Manual
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Thermal loading conditions can be:
Temperatures Regions of the model where temperatures are known.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Heat flow Points where the heat flow rate is known.
Heat flux Surfaces where the heat flow rate per unit area is known.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Convections Surfaces where heat is transferred to (or from)
surroundings by means of convection. Input consists of
film coefficient h and bulk temperature of the surrounding
fluid T
b
.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
fluid T
b
.
Heat generation Regions where the volumetric heat generation rate is
known.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Adiabatic surfaces Perfectly insulated surfaces where no heat transfer takes
place.
Radiation* Surfaces where heat transfer occurs by means of radiation
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-5
Radiation Surfaces where heat transfer occurs by means of radiation.
Input consists of emissivity, Stefan-Boltzmann constant,
and optionally, temperature at a space node.
* Not covered in this course
Training Manual
Nodal Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
y
Unlike the structural analysis displacement and force boundary
conditions, the analogous thermal analysis temperature and heat
fl b d diti t d d t th d l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
flow boundary conditions are not dependent on the nodal
coordinate system.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-6
Training Manual
Temperature Constraints
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Temperature Constraints
Used to specify a known temperature in the model
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Used to specify a known temperature in the model.
To apply displacement constraints :
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply >
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
pp y
Thermal > Temperature
constraint.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
g p
window.
Then enter the temperature value. Value
defaults to zero.
Or use the D family of commands: DK, DL,
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
DA, D.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-7
Training Manual
Concentrated Heat Flow
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To apply a heat flow, the following information is needed:
node or keypoint number (which you can identify by picking)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
heat flow magnitude (which should be consistent with the system of
units you are using)
Use:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Thermal > Heat Flow
Or the commands FK or F
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-8
Training Manual
Heat Flux
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Heat Flux:
T l h t fl
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To apply heat flux:
Main Menu > Solution > Define
Loads > Apply > Thermal > Heat flux
Choose where you want to
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Choose where you want to
apply the heat flux-- usually on
lines for 2-D models, on areas
for 3-D models.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
graphics window.
Then enter the heat flux
values.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Or use the SF family of
commands: SFL, SFA, SFE,
SF.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-9
Training Manual
Convections
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Convective Loads
T l ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To apply a convection:
> Thermal > Convection
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
convection -- usually on lines for 2-D
models, on areas for 3-D models.
window
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
window.
Then enter the film coefficient and bulk
temperature values.
Or use the SF command family:
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
y
SFL, SFA, SFE, SF.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-10
Training Manual
Heat Generation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Heat Generation
T l h t ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To apply heat generation:
Maine Menu > Solution > Define Loads >
Apply > Thermal > Heat Generation
Choose where you want to apply
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Choose where you want to apply
the heat generation-- usually on
areas for 2-D models, on volumes
for 3-D models.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
graphics window.
Then enter the heat generation
values.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Or use the BF family of
commands: BFL, BFA, BFE, BF.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-11
Training Manual
Adiabatic Surfaces
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Adiabatic Surfaces
Perfectly insulated surfaces where no heat transfer takes place
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Perfectly insulated surfaces where no heat transfer takes place.
This is the default condition, i.e, any surface with no boundary
conditions specified is automatically treated as an adiabatic surface
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-12
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
T dif l d l i l l th l d
y g g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To modify a load value, simply reapply the load
with the new value.
To delete loads:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Delete
When you delete solid model loads, ANSYS also
automatically deletes all corresponding finite element
loads
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
loads.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-13
Training Manual
Solutions Options
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Steady State vs. Transient Analysis
A t d t t l i th t th l di diti h
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A steady state analysis assumes that the loading conditions have
settled down to a steady level, with little or no time dependency.
A transient analysis conditions that are changing with time.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y g g
For example, consider the analysis of a clothes iron which takes 1
minute to reach a constant temperature N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The analysis of the clothes iron for the first 1 minute of operation would be
transient.
After a constant temperature is reached the analysis would be steady
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
After a constant temperature is reached, the analysis would be steady
state.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-14
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Reviewing results of a thermal analysis generally involves:
temperature distribution
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
temperature distribution
thermal gradient distribution
thermal flux distribution
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-15
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Temperature Distribution:
To plot temperature contours
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solution > Temperature
Or use the PLNSOL command.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-16
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Thermal Gradients:
To plot thermal gradient contours:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
p g
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-17
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Thermal Flux:
To plot thermal gradient contours:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
p g
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-18
Training Manual
Review Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Reaction Forces
Th f th ti h t fl t b l th f th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The sum of the reaction heat flows must balance the sum of the
applied heat flows
Best viewed as a listing:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g
General Postprocessor > List Results > Reaction Solution or PRRSOL
command
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-19
Training Manual
Verify Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
the solution is acceptable. What you need to check depends on
th t f bl l i b t h t i l
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
the type of problem you are solving, but here are some typical
questions to ask:
Do FEA results agree hand calculations or experimental data?
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p
Is the temperature solution correct? Check the FEA temperature
solution first since FEA heat fluxes are second order results.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Do the reaction heat flows balance the applied heat flows?
Where is the maximum heat flux located?
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-20
Training Manual
Verify Results
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Is the mesh adequate?
This is always debatable, but you can gain confidence in the mesh by
i ti ti
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
using error estimation.
Other ways to check mesh adequacy:
Plot the element solution (unaveraged stresses) and look for
elements with high heat flux gradients. These regions are
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
elements with high heat flux gradients. These regions are
candidates for mesh refinement.
If there is a significant difference between the nodal (averaged)
and element (unaveraged) heat flux contours, the mesh may be too
coarse
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
coarse.
Similarly, if there is a significant difference between
PowerGraphics and full graphics heat flux, the mesh may be too
coarse.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Re-mesh with twice as many elements, re-solve, and compare the
results. (But this may not always be practical.)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-21
Training Manual
Chapter 12 D. Workshop
Workshop
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
W12. Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
12-22
Chapter 13
Postprocessing
Training Manual
Chapter 13 - Postprocessing
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are many ways to review results in the general
postprocessor (POST1), some of which have already been
d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
covered.
In this chapter, we will explore two additional methods query
picking and path operations and also introduce you to the
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p g p p y
concepts of results transformation, error estimation, and load
case combination.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-2
Training Manual
A. Query Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Query picking allows you to probe the model for stresses,
displacements, or other results quantities at any picked location.
y g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You can also quickly locate the maximum and minimum values of
the item being queried.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Available only through the GUI (no commands):
General Postproc > Query Results > Nodal or Element or Subgrid Solu
Choose a results quantity and press OK
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
PowerGraphics
OFF
PowerGraphics
ON
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-3
Training Manual
Query Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Then pick any point in the model to see the results value at that point.
Min and Max will show the value at the minimum and maximum
i t
y g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
points.
Use Reset to clear all values and start over.
Notice that the entity number, its location, and the results value are
also shown in the Picker.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
also shown in the Picker.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Automatically
generate text
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
annotation
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-4
Training Manual
Query Picking
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Continue from the last multi-load-step solution of rib.db
Pl t SEQV f l d t 1
y g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Plot SEQV for load step 1
Query Nodal Solu SEQV at several locations, including MIN & MAX. (Switch to
full graphics if needed.)
Switch to PowerGraphics and query Subgrid Solu. O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-5
Training Manual
B. Results Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
All direction-dependent quantities that you view in POST1, such
as component stresses, displacements, and reaction forces, are
t d i th lt di t t (RSYS)
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
reported in the results coordinate system (RSYS).
RSYS defaults to 0 (global Cartesian). That is, POST1 transforms
all results to global Cartesian by default, including results at
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g y , g
rotated nodes.
But there are many situations such as pressure vessels and
spherical structures where you need to check the results in a
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
spherical structures where you need to check the results in a
cylindrical, spherical, or other local coordinate system.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-6
Training Manual
Results Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To change the results CS to a different
system, use:
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
General Postproc > Options for Outp
or the RSYS command
All b t t l t li ti i k t ill t
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
All subsequent contour plots, listings, query picks, etc. will report
the values in that system.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Default orientation
RSYS,0
Local cylindrical
system RSYS,11
Global cylindrical
system RSYS,1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-7
Training Manual
Results Coordinate System
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
RSYS,SOLU
Sets the results CS to As calculated.
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
All subsequent contour plots, listings, query picks, etc. will report the
values in the nodal and element coordinate systems.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
DOF results and reaction forces will be in the nodal CS.
Stresses, strains, etc. will be in the element CS. (The orientation of
the element CS depends on the element type and the ESYS
attribute of the element Most solid elements for example default
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
attribute of the element. Most solid elements, for example, default
to global Cartesian.)
Not supported by PowerGraphics.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-8
Training Manual
C. Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Another way to review results is via path operations, which allow
you to: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
map results data onto an arbitrary path through the model
perform mathematical operations along the path, including integration
and differentiation
display a path plot see how a result item varies along the path
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
display a path plot see how a result item varies along the path
Available only for models containing 2-D or 3-D solid elements or
shell elements.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-9
Training Manual
Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Three steps to produce a path plot:
Define a path
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Map data onto the path
Plot the data
1 Define a Path
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
1. Define a Path
Requires the following information:
Points defining the path (2 to 1000). You can use existing nodes or
locations on the working plane. N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Path curvature, determined by the active coordinate system
(CSYS).
A name for the path.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-10
Training Manual
Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1. Define a Path (contd)
First activate the desired coordinate system (CSYS). O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
General Postproc > Path Operations > Define Path > By Nodes or On
Working Plane
Pick the nodes or WP locations that form the desired path, and
press OK
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
Choose a path name. The nSets and nDiv fields are best left to
default in most cases.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP From P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-11
To
Training Manual
Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
2. Map Data onto Path
General Postproc > Path Operations > Map onto Path (or PDEF
command)
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
command)
Choose desired quantity, such as SEQV.
Enter a label for the quantity, to be used on plots and listings.
You can now display the path if needed
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
You can now display the path if needed.
General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Paths
(or issue /PBC,PATH,1 followed by NPLOT or EPLOT)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-12
Training Manual
Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
3. Plot the Data
You can plot path items either on a graph: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
PLPATH or General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Path Item >
On Graph
or along path geometry:
PLPAGM or General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Path Item >
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
PLPAGM or General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Path Item >
On Geometry
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-13
Training Manual
Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS allows you to define multiple paths, each
with a unique name that you assign. Only one
th b ti t ti
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
path can be active at a time.
Besides plots and listings, there are many other
path capabilities, including:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p p , g
Stress linearization used in the pressure vessel
industry to decompose stress along a path into its
membrane and bending components.
Calculus functions used in fracture mechanics to
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Calculus functions used in fracture mechanics to
calculate J-integrals and stress concentration
factors. Also useful in thermal analyses to
calculate the heat lost or gained across a path.
D t d t d d t d id l i
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Dot products and cross products used widely in
electromagnetics analyses to operate on vector
quantities.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-14
Training Manual
Path Operations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Continue with rib postprocessing
Pl t d th it h t CSYS 1 if d i d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Plot nodes, then switch to CSYS,1 if desired
Define a path using nodes
Map SX or SEQV or other data onto path
Plot the path itself
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Plot the path item on graph and on geometry
Define a second path elsewhere in the model and show how to toggle between
the two.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-15
Training Manual
Chapter 13 Postprocessing
D. Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The finite element solution calculates stresses on a per-element
basis, i.e, stresses are individually calculated in each element. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
When you plot nodal stress contours in POST1, however, you will
see smooth contours because the stresses are averaged at the
nodes.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
If you plot the element solution, you will see unaveraged data,
which shows the discontinuity between elements.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
avg
= 1100
The difference between averaged and
unaveraged stresses gives an indication
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Elem 1 Elem 2
= 1200 = 1000
= 1300 = 1100
of how good or how bad the mesh is.
This is the basis for error estimation.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-16
avg
= 1200
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Error estimation is available only in POST1 and is valid only for:
linear static structural and linear steady-state thermal analyses
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
solid elements (2-D and 3-D) and shell elements
Full Graphics (not PowerGraphics)
If these conditions are not met ANSYS automatically turns off
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
If these conditions are not met, ANSYS automatically turns off
error estimation calculations.
To manually activate or deactivate error estimation, use
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ERNORM,ON/OFF
or General Postproc > Options for Outp
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-17
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
POST1 calculates the following error measures.
Stress analysis:
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
percentage error in energy norm (SEPC)
element stress deviations (SDSG)
element energy error (SERR) O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
maximum and minimum stress bounds (SMXB, SMNB)
Thermal analysis:
percentage error in energy norm (TEPC)
l t th l di t d i ti (TDSG)
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
element thermal gradient deviations (TDSG)
element energy error (TERR)
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-18
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Percentage error in energy norm (SEPC)
SEPC i h ti t f th t ( di l t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
SEPC is a rough estimate of the stress error (or displacement,
temperature, or thermal flux) over the entire set of selected
elements.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Can be used to compare similar models of similar structures
subjected to similar loadings.
SEPC is shown in the legend column of deformed shape displays
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
SEPC is shown in the legend column of deformed shape displays.
You can list it manually using PRERR or General Postproc > List
Results > Percent Error.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-19
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
As a general rule of thumb,
look for SEPC to be 10% or
l If it i hi h th
SEPC = 35.149
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
less. If it is higher, then:
Check for point loads or
other stress singularities and
unselect elements in the
SEPC 35.149
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
vicinity.
If it is still higher, plot the
element energy error. The
elements with high values of
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
g
energy error are candidates
for mesh refinement. SEPC = 3.484
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-20
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element stress deviations (SDSG)
SDSG is a measure of the amount by
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
SDSG is a measure of the amount by
which an elements stress disagrees with
the stress averages at its nodes.
You can plot SDSG contours using
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
You can plot SDSG contours using
PLESOL,SDSG or General Postproc > Plot
Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu...
A high value of SDSG is not necessarily
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
A high value of SDSG is not necessarily
bad, especially if it is a small percentage
of the nominal stresses in the structure.
For example this plate-with-a-hole model
SDSG t l ti f i t t
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
For example, this plate-with-a-hole model
shows only a 1.5% stress deviation in the
region of interest.
SDSG at location of interest
= ~450 psi, which is ~1.5% of
~30,000 psi nominal stress
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-21
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Element energy error (SERR)
SERR i th i t d ith th t i t h t th
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
SERR is the energy associated with the stress mismatches at the
nodes of the element. This is the basic error measure from which
the other error quantities are derived. SERR has units of energy.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
To plot SERR contours, issue PLESOL,SERR or General Postproc >
Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu
Generally the elements with the highest SERR are candidates for
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Generally, the elements with the highest SERR are candidates for
mesh refinement. However, since SERR will always be highest at
stress singularities, be sure to unselect those elements first.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-22
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Stress bounds (SMXB and SMNB)
Th t b d h l d t i th t ti l ff t f
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The stress bounds can help you determine the potential effect of
mesh discretization error on the maximum stress.
They are displayed on stress contour plots in the legend column
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y p y p g
as SMXB (upper bound) and SMNB (lower bound).
The bounds are not estimates of the actual maximum and
minimum but they do define a confidence band Without other
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
minimum, but they do define a confidence band. Without other
supporting verification, you have no basis for believing that the
true maximum stress is below SMXB.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-23
Training Manual
Error Estimation
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Caution: If you dont unselect elements near stress singularities,
the stress bounds are meaningless, as shown below. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
SMXB = 6,401 SMXB = 15,750
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-24
Training Manual
E. Load Case Combinations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Whenever you solve multiple load steps, the results of each load
step are stored as separate sets on the results file (identified by load
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
step number).
A load case combination is an operation between two sets of
results which are called load cases
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
results, which are called load cases.
The operation occurs between one load case in the database and the
second load case on the results file.
The result of the operation the combined load case is stored back
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
in the database.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Load case in database Load case
Combined load case in database
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-25
Load case in database
(computer memory)
Load case
on results file
Combined load case in database
overwrites previous contents
Training Manual
Load Case Combinations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Typical procedure:
1 C t th l d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
1. Create the load cases
2. Read one load case into the database
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
3. Perform the desired operation
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-26
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Create Load Cases
A l d i l t i t t t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A load case simply acts as a pointer to a set
of results. It requires two pieces of
information:
a unique ID number
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
a unique ID number
the results set it represents (load step and
substep number)
Use the LCDEF command or General
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Use the LCDEF command or General
Postproc > Load Case > Create Load Case
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-27
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Read One Load Case into the Database (memory)
Si l id tif th lt t b it l d
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Simply identify the results set by its load case
number using LCASE or General Postproc > Load
Case > Read Load Case.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Or use one of the standard Read Results choices
in the postprocessor (SET command).
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-28
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Perform the Desired Operation
M ti il bl h i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Many operations are available as shown in
the menu here.
Use the LCOPER command or General
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Postproc > Load Case > Add, Subtract, etc.
Remember that the results of the operation
are stored in the database (memory) The
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
are stored in the database (memory). The
combined load case is identified on plots
and listings as number 9999.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-29
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are two useful options to
save the combined load case:
Write a load case file
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Write a load case file
Append the load case to the results
file
Writing a load case file (LCWRITE
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
or General Postproc > Write Results)
creates a file that is similar to, but
much smaller than the results file.
The Append option (RAPPND or
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
pp p (
General Postproc > Load Case >
Write Load Case) allows you to add
the combined load case to the
results file and identify it with a
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
y
given load step number and time
value.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-30
Training Manual
F. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions:
W13A. Connecting Rod
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W13B. Spherical Shell
W13C. Axisymmetric Fin with Multiple Load Steps
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-31
Training Manual
G. Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The Results Viewer is a specialized postprocessing menu and graphic
system.
Fast graphics for large models or models that have many time steps
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Fast graphics for large models or models that have many time steps
Easy to use menu system for quick results viewing
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-32
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Can be created two different ways
Use the POUTRES command before solving
to write a jobname pgr file during solution
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
to write a jobname.pgr file during solution.
Main Menu > Solution > Load Step Opts >
Output Ctrls > PGR File
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Hold CTRL key for
multiple selection
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-33
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Use the PGWRITE command after solution
to write a jobname.pgr file.
General Postproc > Write PGR File
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
General Postproc > Write PGR File
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-34
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Open the Results Viewer from the General Post Processor.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-35
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Nodal/element/vector/trace
results plots
A i t i
Time History
Variable Viewer
Report
Image
Capture
Report
Animation
Capture
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Element Plot
Animate using
PNG files
Report
Listing
Capture
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Report
Table
Capture
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Results Set
Locator Time
Substep
Raise
Hidden
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Query Results
List
Image Capture
Report Generation
Mode
Load Step
Substep
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-36
List
Results
Mode
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The graphics window becomes Context Sensitive.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Context-sensitive graphics window
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Context sensitive graphics window
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Right Click on Model
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Right Click on Model
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-37
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
g p
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP Right Click on Contour Legend P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-38
Training Manual
Results Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
g p
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-39
Right Click on Contour Bar
Training Manual
Chapter 13 Postprocessing
H. Variable Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The Variable Viewer is a specialized tool allowing one to postprocess results
with respect to time.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The Variable Viewer can be started by:
Simply opening the Time History Postprocessor, or
Main Menu > TimeHist Postproc > Variable Viewer
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-40
Training Manual
Variable Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10 11
Add variable button 1
Delete variable button 2
Graph variable button 3
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
12
List variable button 4
Properties button 5
Import data button 6
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Export data button 7
Export data type 8
Clear Time History Data 9
R f h Ti Hi D 10
14 13
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Refresh Time History Data 10
Variable name input area
11
16
Real/Imaginary Components
Variable list
12
13
15
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
17
Variable name input area
Expression input area 14
Defined APDL variables 15
Defined Post26 variables 16
13
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-41
17 Calculator
Training Manual
Variable Viewer
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
OO
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
k = 36kN/m
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
100kg
x
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
25kg
k = 36kN/m
y
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
F
<
>
=
0 , 0
0 , 4000
t
t N
F
y
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-42
< 0 , 0 t
Training Manual
I. Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
A time consuming part of any
analysis is documenting the
d l d lt Thi
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
model and results. This
procedure has been partially
automated through the
implementation of the ANSYS
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
Report Generator.
The Report Generator allows
the user to quickly capture
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
the user to quickly capture
pictures, listings, tables, and
other pertinent information.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
It also facilitates the creation of
an HTML formatted file ready to
be distributed to colleagues or
posted to a web site
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-43
posted to a web site.
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Launching the Report Generator will
shrink the graphics window and set the
b k d t hit
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
background to white.
The Capture Tool will be opened
allowing the user to grab plots, listings,
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g p , g ,
and tables.
Utility Menu> File> Report Generator
or
i idl t t lb t
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
~eui,euidl::report::toolbar::create
or
Select on the Icon Toolbar.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-44
Capture Tool
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Table
Capture Tool
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Animation Capture
(multiple PNG files)
Capture
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Image Capture
(single PNG file)
S tti
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Settings
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
HTML Report
Assembler
Li ti
The Log File records
all captures!
The Log File records
all captures!
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-45
Listing
Capture
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
HTML Assembler . . .
A tool that allows quick
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
A tool that allows quick
organization of ANSYS graphics,
tables, listings .
Log file can be used as an HTML
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Log file can be used as an HTML
template.
utilize parameter substitution
The generated HTML file can be
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The generated HTML file can be
used with Netscape Composer,
Microsoft FrontPage, or any other
HTML editor to finalize the report.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-46
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Insert TEXT
Insert any HTML FILE
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Insert any HTML FILE
possibly created outside ANSYS
Insert an IMAGE
possibly one from an external
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
possibly one from an external
source like a digital photo
Insert DYNAMIC DATA
information specific to your current
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
information specific to your current
ANSYS run like version, run time,
etc.
Insert a Report Heading
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
p g
Including your name, analysis title,
date, and company name
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-47
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Insert information grabbed using
the Capture Tool
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Report Images
Contour plots, element plots,
volume plots, graphs
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Report Tables
Material properties, reaction forces,
etc.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Report Lists
Stress along a path, constraints,
etc.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-48
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Preview the report
Delete sections of the report
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Delete sections of the report
Move sections of the report up or
down
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-49
Training Manual
Report Generator
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
OO
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-50
Training Manual
J. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions:
W13D. Results Viewer
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W13E. Report Generator
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
13-51
Chapter 14
Short Topics
Training Manual
Chapter 14 Short Topics
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In this chapter, we will present some general tips and tricks on
how to use ANSYS more efficiently O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-2
Training Manual
A. Toolbar and Abbreviations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
An abbreviation is a short-cut to commonly used functions. It is a
character string that represents one or more ANSYS commands. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Whenever you define an abbreviation, it appears as a button in the
ANSYS Toolbar, giving you one-button access to the desired
function.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
There are five predefined abbreviations when you first start
ANSYS, but you can modify them or add your own up to 100
total abbreviations
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
total abbreviations.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-3
Training Manual
Toolbar and Abbreviations
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
As an example, to display line numbers on a line plot, you would need to
do the following:
Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering > Line numbers On > OK
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering > Line numbers On > OK
Utility Menu > Plot > Lines
Later, to turn off line numbers, you would have to use the same menus
again
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
again.
Instead, you could define three abbreviations:
LINE_ON for the command string *ABBR,LINE_ON,/pnum,line,on
LINE OFF f *ABBR LINE OFF / li ff
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
LINE_OFF for *ABBR,LINE_OFF,/pnum,line,off
LPLOT for the command string *ABBR,LPLOT,lplot
and simply press the appropriate combinations of buttons in the toolbar to
turn line numbering on or off For example hit followed by to
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
turn line numbering on or off. For example, hit followed by to
turn line numbering on and display a line plot.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-4
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The following information is needed for an abbreviation:
The short-cut name
The command string it represents To find out the command for a particular
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
The command string it represents. To find out the command for a particular
function, first execute the function using the GUI, then list the log file (Utility Menu
> List > Files > Log File).
Use the *ABBR command to define abbreviations:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Use the ABBR command to define abbreviations:
*ABBR, name, command_string
A convenient dialog box is available for this:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
A convenient dialog box is available for this:
Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Edit Toolbar
or Utility Menu > Macro > Edit Abbreviations
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-5
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Abbreviations are stored in the standard ANSYS database, so they
get saved to the .db file when you save the database. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You can also write abbreviations to an ASCII file, jobname.abbr:
Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Save Toolbar
or Utility Menu > Macro > Save Abbr
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
or Utility Menu > Macro > Save Abbr
or ABBSAV command
To restore abbreviations from a file, use:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Restore Toolbar
or Utility Menu > Macro > Restore Abbr
or ABBRES command
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-6
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
By creating a series of .abbr files and with a clever use of ABBSAV
and ABBRES functions, you can create nested toolbars
b tt th t b i ti l t f b tt d t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
buttons that bring up an entirely new set of buttons and put
together a menu of your own!
Once you master the ANSYS command language, there is virtually
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y g g , y
no limit to the power and usefulness of abbreviations!
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-7
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume rib.db
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Create abbreviations EPLOT, APLOT, LPLOT, KPLOT
Delete KPLOT abbreviation
Save abbreviations to file.abbr, then list the file
Now list the log file and show the ABBSAVE command (This is how
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Now list the log file and show the ABBSAVE command. (This is how
you can find out the commands for a given function.)
Resume rib.db again
Restore abbreviations from file.abbr and use the buttons
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-8
Training Manual
B. Start File
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Whenever you start ANSYS, it reads a start file called start100.ans
(or start90.ans, start81.ans, etc. depending on ANSYS revision). O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You can include any commands in the start file. The most
common ones are abbreviation definitions.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ANSYS checks for the start file first in the working directory and
then in your home directory. If no file is found, it will read the
default start file in the ANSYS apdl directory (..\v100\ansys\apdl).
Th d f lt t t fil t i l t d bb i ti ll f
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The default start file contains several suggested abbreviations, all of
them commented out. You can make a copy of it and uncomment
the ones you want to use.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-9
Training Manual
C. APDL
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
APDL is an acronym for ANSYS Parametric Design Language, a
powerful scripting language that allows you to parameterize your
d l d t t t k
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
model and automate common tasks.
Using APDL, you can:
input model dimensions, material properties, etc. in terms of
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
input model dimensions, material properties, etc. in terms of
parameters rather than numbers.
retrieve information from the ANSYS database, such as a node
location or maximum stress.
perform mathematical calculations among parameters including
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
perform mathematical calculations among parameters, including
vector and matrix operations.
define abbreviations (short cuts) for frequently used commands or
macros.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
create a macro to execute a sequence of tasks, with if-then-else
branching, do-loops, and user prompts.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-10
Training Manual
D. Defining Parameters
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To define a parameter, use the format
N V l
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Name=Value
Can be typed in the input window or in
the Scalar Parameters dialog (Utility Menu
> Parameters > Scalar Parameters...)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Name is the parameter name, thirty-two
alphanumeric characters or less.
Value may be a number, a previously
defined parameter a mathematical
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
defined parameter, a mathematical
function, a parametric expression, or a
character string (enclosed in single
quotes).
Can be kept in start## ans file for
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Can be kept in start##.ans file for
commonly used parameters, such as
PI = acos(-1)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-11
Training Manual
...Defining Parameters
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Examples:
inrad=2.5 g=386
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
outrad=8.2
numholes=4
thick=outrad-inrad
e=2 7e6
massdens=density/g
circumf=2*pi*rad
area=pi*r**2
dist=sqrt((y2 y1)**2+(x2 x1)**2)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
e=2.7e6
density=0.283
bb=cos(30)
pi=acos(-1)
dist=sqrt((y2-y1) 2+(x2-x1) 2)
slope=(y2-y1)/(x2-x1)
theta=atan(slope)
jobname=proj1
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
p ( ) j p j
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-12
See *SET command for a list of valid function
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
The examples above are scalar parameters, which have a single
value either numeric or character. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS also supports array parameters, which have multiple
values. Both numeric and character arrays are available. Array
parameters will not be discussed in this course.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
28 7 j b1
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
28.7
-9.2
-2.1
51.0
xvalues =
job1
job2
job3
job4
filnam =
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
0.0
j
job5
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-13
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Some naming rules:
P t t b thi t t h t l b i i
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Parameter names must be thirty-two characters or less, beginning
with a letter.
Only letters, numbers, and the underscore character are
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y , , _
allowed.
Avoid underscore _ as starting character reserved for ANSYS
use
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
use.
Names are not case-sensitive, i.e, RAD and Rad are the same.
All parameters are internally stored in capital letters.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1 Avoid common ANSYS labels such as STAT, DEFA, and ALL.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-14
Training Manual
E. Using Parameters
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
To use a parameter, simply enter its name in the appropriate field
in the dialog box or on the command. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
For example, to define a rectangle using the parameters w=10 and
h=5,
you can use the menu:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
you can use the menu:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create >
Area > Rectangle > By 2 Corners
or commands:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
/prep7
blc4,,,w,h
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-15
Training Manual
...Using Parameters
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Note:
Wh t ANSYS i di t l b tit t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Whenever you use parameters, ANSYS immediately substitutes
their values.
The rectangle in the previous example is stored as a 10x5 area,
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p p ,
not as w x h. That is, if you change the value of w or h after
creating the rectangle, the area will NOT be updated.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-16
Training Manual
...Using Parameters
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Other examples of using parameters:
jobname=proj1
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
/filnam,jobname ! Jobname
/prep7
youngs=30e6
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y g
mp,ex,1,youngs ! Youngs modulus
force=500
fk,2,fy,-force ! Force at KP 2
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
y
fk,6,fx,force/2 ! Force at KP 6
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-17
Training Manual
F. Retrieving Database Information
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
To retrieve information from the database and assign it to a
parameter, use the *GET command or Utility Menu > Parameters >
G t S l D t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Get Scalar Data...
A vast amount of information is available, including model and
results data. Refer to the *GET command description for details.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-18
Training Manual
...Retrieving Database Information
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Examples:
*get,x1,node,1,loc,x ! x1 = X coordinate of node 1 [CSYS]*
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
/post1
*get,sx25,node,25,s,x ! sx25 = X stress at node 25 [RSYS]*
*get,uz44,node,44,u,z ! uz44 = UZ displacement at node 44 [RSYS]*
nsort s eqv ! Sort nodes by von Mises stress
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
nsort,s,eqv ! Sort nodes by von Mises stress
*get,smax,sort,,max ! smax = maximum of last sort
etable,vol,volu ! Store element volumes as vol
ssum ! Sum all element table columns
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
*get,totvol,ssum,,vol ! totvol = sum of vol column
*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS) P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
RSYS = In the active results coordinate system (RSYS)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-19
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
Some data can be retrieved with a get function.
E l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Examples:
x1=nx(1) ! x1 = X coordinate of node 1 [CSYS]*
nn=node(2.5,3,0) ! nn = node at or near (2.5,3,0) [CSYS]*
/post1
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
/post1
ux25=ux(25) ! ux25 = UX at node 25 [RSYS]*
temp93=temp(93) ! temp93 = temperature at node 93
width=distnd(23,88) ! width = distance between nodes 23 & 88 N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)
RSYS = In the active results coordinate system (RSYS)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-20
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
You can use a get function directly in a field, just like a parameter.
For example: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
k,10,kx(1),ky(3) ! KP 10 at X of KP 1, Y of KP 3 [CSYS]*
k,11,kx(1)*2,ky(3) ! [CSYS]*
f,node(2,2,0),fx,100 ! FX force at node(2,2,0) [CSYS]*
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-21
*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)
Training Manual
G. Batch Mode
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
In batch mode, ANSYS reads commands from an input file you
supply, and writes responses to an output file. The process runs
i th b k d f i t f th k
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
in the background, freeing up your computer for other work.
Of the three main phases of an analysis preprocessing,
solution, postprocessing the solution phase is best suited for
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
, p p g p
batch mode. Thus a batch input file could be as simple as:
/batch
resume,... ! Resume database from preprocessing session
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
/solu
solve
finish
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-22
Training Manual
H. Input files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
ANSYS is a command-driven program and can accept commands
from several sources:
f GUI di l b ( hi h i l d d t ANSYS
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
from GUI dialog boxes (which simply send commands to ANSYS
when you press OK or Apply)
from the keyboard
from input files
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
p
An efficient way to run ANSYS, especially when you are rerunning
a previous analysis, is to use input files containing the desired
command sequence:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
command sequence:
Utility Menu > File > Read Input from
or the /INPUT command
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
(The start file is just an input file that is automatically read at start-
up by a built-in /input command.)
The path of the input file can have a maximum length of 250
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-23
The path of the input file can have a maximum length of 250
characters (path and filename) plus an eight character extension
Training Manual
Input files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
For example, you can create a file called rectangle.inp containing
the following lines: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
/prep7 ! Enter preprocessor
rect,0,3,0,1 ! Create a 3x1 rectangle
aplot
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
and then read it into ANSYS:
/input,rectangle,inp ! or File > Read Input from
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The ! character above indicates a comment and can be used to:
annotate the input file with explanations.
comment out an entire command.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Note: Cutting and pasting commands into the Input window is
NOT a supported feature.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-24
Training Manual
Input files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
When an input file ( or a macro ) is executed in the wrong module,
repeated warnings occur. Upon encountering five such warnings
di l b ll i t t d it l l
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
a dialog box appears allowing you to stop and exit cleanly.
You can use the log file jobname.log as an input file. Keep in
mind the following points when you do this:
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p y
The log file records all commands executed during an ANSYS session.
Always use a copy of the log file, dont just rename it.
It may be helpful to edit the copy first and:
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
add descriptive comments
clean it up by removing erroneous commands and graphics
commands (/view, /focus, /dist, etc.)
add prompting commands (*ASK)
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
add prompting commands (*ASK)
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-25
Training Manual
Input files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
The *ASK Command
*ASK t th f i t d i th t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
*ASK prompts the user for input and assigns the response to a
parameter. For example, you can modify rectangle.inp as follows:
/prep7 ! Enter preprocessor
*ask w WIDTH OF RECTANGLE 3
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ask,w,WIDTH OF RECTANGLE,3
rect,0,w,0,1 ! Create a wx1 rectangle
aplot
Wh i t thi fil i t ANSYS ill th t
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
When you input this file into ANSYS, you will see the prompt
shown below. Your response, say 5.2, is assigned to the
parameter w, which is used in the subsequent RECT command.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-26
Training Manual
Input files
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
*ASK, Par, Query, DVAL
Par is the parameter name to which the response value is assigned.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Query is the prompt string, up to 32 characters. The word ENTER
automatically appears as the first word of the prompt.
DVAL is the default value assigned to Par if the response is blank.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-27
Training Manual
I. Session Editor
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Session Editor
Powerful ANSYS Undo
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
ANSYS keeps a running copy of your log file from
your last save command.
By modifying the values in the Session Editor
window and clicking OK, the modified commands
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g ,
are read back into ANSYS.
Main Menu > Session Editor
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-28
Training Manual
Summary
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Summary:
D fi t i th f t N V l
y
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Define parameters using the format Name=Value.
Value may be a number, a previously defined parameter, a
mathematical function, a parametric expression, or a character
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
, p p ,
string.
Use *GET or get functions to retrieve data from the ANSYS
database
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
database.
ANSYS stores data in their actual form (numbers or strings), not in
the form of parameter names.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-29
Training Manual
J. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
W14A Abbreviations
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
W14B 2-D Bracket Using Parameters
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
14-30
Appendix A
ANSYS Native Geometry
Creation and Best Modeling
Practices Practices
Training Manual
Appendix A. ANSYS Native Geometry Creation
Overview
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Importing geometry is convenient, but sometimes you may need
to create it in ANSYS. Some possible reasons: O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
You may need to build a parametric model one defined in terms of
variables for later use in design optimization or sensitivity studies.
The geometry may not be available in a format ANSYS can read.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
computer platform.
You may need to modify or add geometry to an imported part or
assembly.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
ANSYS has an extensive set of geometry creation tools, which we
will discuss next.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-2
Training Manual
A. Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Solid Modeling can be defined as the process of
creating solid models. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Definitions:
A solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines,
and keypoints.
Volumes
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
yp
Volumes are bounded by areas, areas by lines, and
lines by keypoints.
Hierarchy of entities from low to high:
k i t li l
Areas
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
keypoints < lines < areas < volumes
You cannot delete an entity if a higher-order entity
is attached to it.
Lines &
Keypoints
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Also, a model with just areas and below, such as
a shell or 2-D plane model, is still considered a
solid model in ANSYS terminology.
Keypoints
Lines
Areas
Volumes
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-3
Keypoints
Training Manual
Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are two approaches to creating a solid model:
Top-down
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Bottom-up
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
shape.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
add
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-4
Training Manual
Definitions
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Bottom-up modeling starts with keypoints, from which you build
up lines, areas, etc. O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
You may choose whichever approach best suits the shape of the
model, and also freely combine both methods.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
We will now discuss each modeling approach in detail.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-5
Training Manual
B. Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
h
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
shape.
The volumes or areas that you initially define are called primitives.
Primitives are located and oriented with the help of the working plane.
The combinations used to produce the final shape are called Boolean
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
The combinations used to produce the final shape are called Boolean
operations.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-6
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Primitives are predefined geometric shapes such as circles,
polygons, and spheres.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
2-D primitives include rectangles, circles, triangles, and other
polygons.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-7
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
3-D primitives include blocks, cylinders, prisms, spheres, and
cones.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-8
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
When you create a 2-D primitive, ANSYS defines an area, along
with its underlying lines and keypoints.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
When you create a 3-D primitive, ANSYS defines a volume, along
with its underlying areas, lines and keypoints.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-9
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
You can create primitives by specifying their dimensions or by
picking locations in the graphics window.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
For example, to create a solid circle:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Circle >
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Instructions
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
By picking
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Area Input:
1.) Pick the center and radius in
graphics window...
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-10
2.) Or enter in Picker Box
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To create a block:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Volumes >Block >
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Instructions
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
By picking
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Volume Input:
1.) Pick the 2 diagonal corners and
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Z-depth in graphics window...
2.) Or enter in Picker Box
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-11
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Boolean operations are computations involving combinations of
geometric entities. ANSYS Boolean operations include add,
bt t i t t di id l d l
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
subtract, intersect, divide, glue, and overlap.
The input to Boolean operations can be any geometric entity,
ranging from simple primitives to complicated volumes imported
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g p p p p
from a CAD system.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
add
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-12
Input entities Boolean operation Output entity(ies)
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
All Boolean operations are available in the GUI under Main Menu
Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
By default, input entities of a Boolean operation are deleted after
the operation.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Deleted entity numbers become free (i.e., they will be assigned
to a new entity created, starting with the lowest available number).
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-13
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Add
Combines two or more entities into one.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-14
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Glue
Attaches two or more entities by creating a common boundary
b t th
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
between them.
Useful when you want to maintain the distinction between entities
(such as for different materials).
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-15
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Overlap
Same as glue, except that the input entities overlap each other.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-16
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Subtract
Removes the overlapping portion of one or more entities from a set of
b titi
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
base entities.
Useful for creating holes or trimming off portions of an entity.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-17
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Divide
Cuts an entity into two or more pieces that are still connected to each
th b b d i
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
other by common boundaries.
The cutting tool may be the working plane, an area, a line, or even a
volume.
Useful for slicing and dicing a complicated volume into simpler
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g g p p
volumes for brick meshing.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-18
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Intersect
Keeps only the overlapping portion of two or more entities.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
If there are more than two input entities, you have two choices:
common intersection and pairwise intersection
Common intersection finds the common overlapping region
among all input entities.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
among all input entities.
Pairwise intersection finds the overlapping region for each pair of
entities and may produce more than one output entity.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Common
Pairwise
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-19
Co o
Intersection
Intersection
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Partition
Cuts two or more intersecting entities into multiple pieces that are still
t d t h th b b d i
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
connected to each other by common boundaries.
Useful, for example, to find the intersection point of two lines and still
retain all four line segments, as shown below. (An intersection
operation would return the common keypoint and delete both lines.)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
L1
L2
L3
L6
Partition
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
L5
L4
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-20
Training Manual
Top-Down Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Drill a hole by subtracting a circle from a rectangle (or a cylinder
f bl k)
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
from a block)
Create two overlapping entities, save db, and do the overlap
operation. Now resume db and add the entities. Note the difference
between the two operations. (Glue is similar to overlap.)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Interesting model:
block,-2,2, 0,2, -2,2
sphere,2.5,2.7
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
vinv,all ! intersection
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-21
Training Manual
C. Workshop
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
WAPP-A 1. Pillow Block
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
OO
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-22
Training Manual
D. Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Bottom-up modeling begins with a definition of keypoints, from
which other entities are built up.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To build an L-shaped object, for example, you could start by
defining the corner keypoints as shown below. You can then
create the area by simply connecting the dots or by first
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
y p y g y
defining lines and then defining the area by lines.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-23
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
To define keypoints:
Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create >
K i t
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Keypoints
Or use the K family of commands: K, KFILL,
KNODE, etc.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
The only data needed to create a keypoint is the keypoint number
and the coordinate location.
Keypoint number defaults to the next available number.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
The coordinate location may be provided by simply picking locations
on the working plane or by entering the X,Y,Z values.
How are the X,Y,Z values interpreted? It depends on the active
coordinate system.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-24
coordinate system.
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
There are many ways to create lines, as shown here.
If d fi l ANSYS ill t ti ll t
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
If you define areas or volumes, ANSYS will automatically generate
any undefined lines, with the curvature determined by the active
CS.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Keypoints must be available in order to create lines.
Create > Lines >
Arcs
Create > Lines >
Lines
Create > Lines >
Splines
Operate >
Extrude
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Arcs Lines Splines Extrude
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-25
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Creating areas using bottom-up method requires keypoints or
lines to be already defined.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
If you define volumes, ANSYS will automatically generate any
undefined areas and lines, with the curvature determined by the
active CS.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Create > Areas >
Arbitrary
Operate > Extrude
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
y
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-26
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Creating volumes using bottom-up method requires keypoints or
areas to be already defined.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Create > Volumes > Operate > Extrude
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Arbitrary
p
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-27
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Boolean operations are available for entities created by both top-
down and bottom-up modeling approaches.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Besides Booleans, many other operations are available:
Extrude
Scale
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Scale
Move
Copy
Reflect
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Merge
Fillet
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-28
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Extrude
To quickly create volumes from existing areas (or areas
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To quickly create volumes from existing areas (or areas
from lines, and lines from keypoints).
If the area is meshed, you can extrude the elements
along with the areas
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
along with the areas.
Four ways to extrude areas:
Along normal creates volume by normal offset of areas
[VOFFST]
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
[VOFFST] .
By XYZ offset creates volume by a general x-y-z offset
[VEXT]. Allows tapered extrusion.
About axis creates volume by revolving areas about an
axis (specified by two keypoints) [VROTAT].
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
( p y yp ) [ ]
Along lines creates volume by dragging areas along a
line or a set of contiguous lines [VDRAG].
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-29
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Scaling is typically needed when you want to convert the geometry to a
different set of units, say from inches to millimeters.
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To scale a model in ANSYS:
First save the database -- Toolbar >
SAVE_DB or SAVE command.
Th M i M P O t
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Then Main Menu > Preprocessor > Operate >
Scale > Volumes (choose the highest-level
entity available in the model)
[Pick All] to pick all volumes
Th d i d l f f
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Then enter desired scale factors for
RX, RY, RZ and set IMOVE to Moved
instead of Copied
Or use the VLSCALE command:
l l ll 25 4 25 4 25 4 1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
vlscale,all,,,25.4,25.4,25.4,,,1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-30
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Move
To translate or rotate an entity by
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
y y
specifying DX,DY,DZ offsets.
DX,DY,DZ are interpreted in the active CS.
To translate an entity, make the active CS
Cartesian.
To rotate an entity make the active CS
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
To rotate an entity, make the active CS
cylindrical or spherical.
Or use the commands
VGEN, AGEN, LGEN, KGEN
Transfer
from csys,0
to csys,11
Rotate
-30
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Another option is to transfer coordinates
to a different system.
Transfer occurs from the active CS to a
specified CS.
This operation is useful when you need to
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
p y
move and rotate an entity at the same time.
Or use the commands
VTRAN, ATRAN, LTRAN, KTRAN
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-31
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Copy
To generate multiple copies of an
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To generate multiple copies of an
entity.
Specify the number of copies (2 or
greater) and the DX DY DZ offset for
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
greater) and the DX,DY,DZ offset for
each copy. DX,DY,DZ are interpreted
in the active CS.
Useful to create multiple holes ribs
Copy in
local
cylindrical
CS
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Useful to create multiple holes, ribs,
protrusions, etc.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Create outer
areas by
skinning
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-32
skinning
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Reflect
T fl t titi b t l
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To reflect entities about a plane.
Specify the direction of reflection:
X for reflection about the YZ plane
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
X for reflection about the YZ plane
Y for XZ plane
Z for XY plane
All di ti i t t d i th
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
All directions are interpreted in the
active CS, which must be a Cartesian
system.
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
What is the direction of
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-33
What is the direction of
reflection in this case?
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Merge
To attach two entities together by removing coincident keypoints
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
To attach two entities together by removing coincident keypoints.
Merging keypoints will automatically merge coincident higher-order entities, if
any.
Usually required after a reflect copy or other operation that causes
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Usually required after a reflect, copy, or other operation that causes
coincident entities.
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Merge or glue
Reflect
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Merge or glue
required
Reflect
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-34
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Fillet
Line fillet requires two intersecting lines with a
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Line fillet requires two intersecting lines with a
common keypoint at the intersection.
If the common keypoint does not exist, do a
partition operation first.
ANSYS does not update the underlying area (if any)
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
ANSYS does not update the underlying area (if any),
so you need to either add or subtract the fillet
region.
Area filleting is similar.
Create N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
g
fillet
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
Subtract from
base area
Create
area
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-35
Training Manual
Bottom-Up Modeling
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
Demo:
Resume r.db (if necessary)
Create two keypoints for the axis at (0 0) and (0 1) then extrude the area by
g
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Create two keypoints for the axis, at (0,0) and (0,1), then extrude the area by
revolving about the axis 60
Resume r.db
Make copies of the rib tangentially about the Y-axis:
C t l l li d i l CS t l b l i i ith THYZ 90
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Create a local cylindrical CS at global origin, with THYZ = -90
Generate 7 total copies (6 new ones) with DY=15
Create the three outer skin areas using ASKIN,P
Resume r.db
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Create a 0.5R fillet between the top and right lines. (Notice that the lines
attached to the area have been modified. This is allowed in some cases.)
Create the triangular fillet area by lines (AL,P), then subtract it from the main
area. P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-36
Training Manual
Appendix Workshops
E. Workshops
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
WAPP-A 2. Connecting Rod Bottom-Up Approach
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
WAPP-A 3. Connecting Rod Importation/Clean-up
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
NN
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPPP
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-37
Training Manual
Appendix A. Best Modeling Practices
F. Best Modeling Practices
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
This section is intended to give users advice on best modeling
practices that will help the user avoid corrupt databases.
Put as much of your ANSYS input as you can into an input file Even simple
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Put as much of your ANSYS input as you can into an input file. Even simple
items such as material data and real constant data, so that your analysis is
easier to debug (and even parameterize).
Do not keep deletes in your database. Use the input file edit a volume or a
element size setting instead of deleting volumes or clearing a mesh
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
element size setting instead of deleting volumes or clearing a mesh.
Perform element attributes (xATT) and Boolean operations BEFORE
meshing. (Absolutely no Booleans after meshing.)
Don't use NUMMRG,KP to pull together non-coincident keypoints.
Examine any imported geometry for slivers voids edges not meeting or
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Examine any imported geometry for slivers, voids, edges not meeting, or
any other geometrical issue.
Ideally, creating the geometry in ANSYS is best for meshing, however some
users must import geometry. Users first option should be to use a
connection product and import a SAT Parasolid etc file As a last resort
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
connection product and import a SAT, Parasolid, etc file. As a last resort
IGES files can also be imported. (Note: It has been some users experience
that the time spent in repeatedly cleaning-up IGES files, makes the
purchase of a Connection Product more than worth the minimal cost.) Try
all methods and see what works best for your case.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-38
Training Manual
...Best Modeling Practices
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
More Suggestions
Do element attribute assignment on solid model geometry (xATT). Dont
EMODIF l b l tti (TYPE MAT REAL) l d t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
use EMODIF or global settings (TYPE, MAT, REAL) unless you need to.
Make backup copies periodically (such as jobname.db1, jobname.db2, etc.).
Check the *.err file for all error messages and understand why warning
messages are printed.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
g p
Use the /EDGE command to display common lines between all adjacent
element faces. With the edge key on, an element plot displays only the
element edges without coplanar share element edges. The NSEL,S,EXT
command will select external nodes for the selected set of elements After
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
command will select external nodes for the selected set of elements. After
plotting these nodes, the user should only see the nodes on the edges of
the selected elements, any other nodes demonstrate problem locations.
Do not perform any Booleans operations while you have any concatenated
lines or areas in the model
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
lines or areas in the model.
Dont divide a line by a meshed line always clear the mesh before
performing Booleans.
Delete any FE-based elements (ie: contact, pretension, surface effect
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-39
elements) before clearing a mesh.
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
More Suggestions
Import all geometry at one time - ie.: dont import, mesh, import.
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
Don't subtract or overlap coincident or tangent geometry.
For example: block,,1,,1,,1 block,,1,,1,,1 vsbv,1,2.
Minimize use of hardpoints.
Minimize use of dragging and skinning
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Minimize use of dragging and skinning.
Minimize use of cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems to create
geometry bottom-up from keypoints.
Where surface or rotation are required, for cylinders, spheres, torus, etc.,
t d th i d i d th t i th f
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
extrude the wire around an axis and then trim the surface as necessary.
This will eliminate the COONS patch problem by providing more precise
NURBS surfaces from the extrusion process.
Use COONS patches generated on non-cartesian coordinate systems only
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
as the last resort. When these are used and the results are needed for
Boolean operations use these surfaces or their associated volumes last in
your operations.
If using multiple load step files (LSWRITE), do this last since .s00 files only
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-40
g p p ( ) y
contain loadings for FE data.
Training Manual
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
I
N
T
R
O
g
More Suggestions
Start with very simple models, using a few elements of the element type
d i d d t t ith i l t i l ti b f di t
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
O
D
U
C
T
I
O
desired and start with simple material properties before upgrading to, say, a
hyperelastic material model.
Take a Verification Manual problem with a known solution and then start
tweaking that towards what you are trying to do.
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
O
N

T
O

A
N
Use the same numbering even though it is redundant such as TYPE 1,
REAL 1, MAT 1 for one part, and TYPE 2, REAL 2, MAT 2, for another part.
This makes attribute assignment easy to keep track of.
Start with a working database and record all Boolean operations in a text
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

N
S
Y
S

---
PPP
Start with a working database and record all Boolean operations in a text
file. If something goes wrong, you can just edit the file and your db will be
fine.
If the database is corrupt, you can resume the database and archive the file
with the CDWRITE as a last resort
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
P
a
r
t

1
with the CDWRITE as a last resort.
Take the time before modeling to plan your approach - this will save you a
lot of time down the road.
February 7, 2006
Inventory #002268
A-41

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Intro.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this training manual?

What are some best practices for modeling in ANSYS discussed in the appendix?

Agenda_Intro1.

is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.

is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.

Part of the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on license

Part of the Parallel Performance for ANSYS add-on license

You might also like